Emerson 400 VMC User's Manual

400 VMC series compressor
Operation and service manual
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER Multicylinder Compressor
OPERATING INSTRUCTION MANUAL
400 SERIES COMPRESSORS
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLING AND STARTING YOUR COMPRESSOR.
The entire manual should be reviewed before attempting to install, service or repair the compressor.
A refrigeration compressor is a positive displacement machine. It is designed to pump superheated
vapor. The compressor must not be subjected to liquid carry over. Care must be exercised in properly
designing and maintaining the system to prevent conditions that could lead to liquid carry over. Vilter
Manufacturing Corporation is not responsible for the system or the controls needed to prevent liquid
carry over and as such Vilter Manufacturing Corporation cannot warrant equipment damaged by improperly protected or operating systems.
Vilter screw compressor components are thoroughly inspected at the factory, assuring the shipment of a
mechanically perfect piece of equipment. Damage can occur in shipment, however. For this reason, the
units should be thoroughly inspected upon arrival. Any damage noted should be reported immediately to
the Transportation Company. This way, an authorized agent can examine the unit, determine the extent
of damage and take necessary steps to rectify the claim with no serious or costly delays. At the same
time, the local Vilter representative or the home office should be notified of any claim made.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
This manual consists of the following sections:
EXTENDED STORAGE PROCEDURES
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION SECTION
This section should be read thoroughly before attempting to install a VMC
Compressor. IMPORTANT: Local codes and ordinances should be
checked beforehand so that violations do not occur, especially concerning
devices for control and safety.
COMPRESSOR OPERATION SECTION
COMPRESSOR SERVICE SECTION
COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT PARTS SECTION
Section 100R
Section 102R
Section 105R
Section 105X
Vilter Stop/Check-Valve General Information
AUTO
In the “Auto Position”, the stop valve is operating as a check valve,
allowing flow in the directions of the arrows.
To set the valve to the automatic position, fully close the valve, and
turn the stem out as indicated by the chart below.
CLOSED
In the manually “Closed Postion”, the stop check is operating as a
convientional stop valve, not allowing flow in either direction.
OPEN
In the manually ” Open Position”, with the valve stem fully back seated,
the valve disc is lifted slightly, allowing flow in either direction.
Verify the location of Spring and note the direction of the Vilter name
Installation:
The new design will apply only to the 2” thru 4” stop valves.
Retrofitting a field installation will require replacing the bonnet
assembly.
The bonnet must be installed with the spring towards the bottom (see
illustrations above). The drill fixture is designed so that the hole for the spring
will always be drilled on the opposite side from the cast in Vilter name on the
bonnet. From the outside of the valve, the casting numbers must always be
towards the top of the valve.
Master Catalog
Pressure Controls Section
Product/Technical Bulletin
Issue Date
125
P
P28
0498
P28 and P128 Series Lube Oil Controls
with Built-in Time Delay Relay
The P28 and P128 Series Lube Oil Controls provide
dependable and economical oil pressure cut-out for
pressure-lubricated refrigeration compressors. The
field-adjustable pressure differential of these controls
provides compressor operation according to the
manufacturer’s specifications. The P28 and P128
controls operate by measuring the net lube oil pressure
and de-energizing the compressor if the pressure falls
below the differential setpoint.
Manual or automatic reset models are available with
factory set and sealed time delays of 30, 45, 60, 90,
or 120 seconds (all time delays may not be available
on all models). The P128 is the same control as the
P28 but with 1/4 inch male flare pressure connections.
Figure 1: P128AA
Features and Benefits
Built-in Time Delay Relay
with Ambient Compensation
Minimizes timing fluctuations due to temperature
variations
Trip-free Manual Reset
Provides manual reset that cannot be overridden
by pressing and holding the reset button
Replaceable Time Delay
Relay Assembly
Allows easy field replacement of the time delay
relay and terminal board
Available with Runlight and
Alarm Terminals
Allows the control to be wired for normal oil
pressure runlight signals and shutdown alarm
circuits for remote monitoring of oil pressure
status
© 1998 Johnson Controls, Inc.
Part No. 24-7664-605, Rev. A
Code No. LIT-125420
1
I ntroduction
!
Dimensions
WARNING: Personal injury hazard. All
P28 and P128 controls are
designed as lubrication
protection controls. Failure of
the P28 or P128 could allow
the refrigeration compressor
to be damaged in a way that
may not be apparent upon
visual inspection. Follow
proper procedures and the
compressor manufacturer’s
instructions, as well as any
warning signs on or around
the equipment, when
discharging and
disassembling the
compressor.
Environmental damage
hazard. If leakage of sensed
media (such as refrigerant or
oil) can be harmful to the
environment, or hazardous in
any way, user must provide
for proper containment.
The P28 and P128 controls measure the net oil
pressure available to circulate oil throughout a
pressure-lubricated refrigeration system. The net oil
pressure is the difference between the oil pressure at
the pump discharge and the refrigerant pressure in
the compressor crankcase.
Example: If the oil pressure pump discharge reading
is 90 psi (621 kPa) and the crankcase
pressure is 70 psi (483 kPa), the net oil
pressure is 20 psi (138 kPa).
The P28 and P128 have a built-in time delay relay.
This relay allows the oil pressure to build up for the
time delay period before the compressor trips. This
also prevents nuisance lockouts due to intermittent
loss of oil pressure. The time delay relay is a
“trip free” device. The manual reset cannot be
overridden by pressing and holding the reset button.
Manual reset models are available with time delays
of 30, 45, 60, 90, or 120 seconds. Automatic reset
models are available with a 90-second time delay.
The time delay relay is compensated to minimize the
effect of ambient temperature variations. However,
the time delay relay will be affected by voltage
variations.
Figure 2: P28 or P128 Dimensions (in./mm)
O peration
When the compressor starts, the timer is energized
because the net oil pressure of the system is zero.
During normal operation, the net oil pressure should
build up to the pressure switch’s cut-out setting
(scale setting) plus the switch differential (3 to 5 psi
[21 to 34 kPa]) within the required time delay,
causing the time delay relay to de-energize.
If the net oil pressure does not rise to the cut-out
pressure setting plus the switch differential within the
required time delay, the time delay relay trips and
stops the compressor.
If the net oil pressure drops below the cut-out
pressure setting during the compressor’s run cycle,
the time delay relay energizes. If the net oil pressure
returns within the time delay, the time delay relay deenergizes and the compressor continues to operate
normally. If the net oil pressure does not return
within the time delay, the control shuts down and
locks out the compressor.
2 P—P28 and P128 Series Lube Oil Controls with Built-in Time Delay Relay Product/Technical Bulletin
Example: Net oil pressure (oil pump pressure minus
crankcase pressure) required to the
bearings is 9 psi (62 kPa). The control
scale setting should be 9 psi (62 kPa).
The switch differential is 5 psi (34 kPa).
Upon initial start of the compressor, the
time delay relay energizes. If the net oil
pressure does not build up to 14 psi
(97 kPa), or the scale setting (9 psi) plus
the switch differential (5 psi), during the
time delay, the control breaks the circuit to
the compressor. If the pressure of 14 psi
(97 kPa) is reached during the time delay,
the time delay relay de-energizes and the
compressor continues to operate normally.
Pressure Connections
!
●
●
●
I nstallation
●
Mounting
!
CAUTION: Equipment damage hazard.
●
●
●
A P28AN or P28DN control used for
ammonia service must be mounted
separately from the electrical cabinet.
An ammonia leak could damage the
electrical circuitry.
Do not use Johnson Controls/Penn
Ecosafe® hose tubing in applications
with ammonia or other corrosive
refrigerants. Corrosion could cause
tube breakage and refrigerant
leakage.
When mounting the control to a
compressor is required, a mounting bracket
(Part No. 271-51) is available.
Coil and secure excess capillary or
tubing. Because harmonic vibration
can break the capillary or tubing, some
slack must be provided.
Do not allow the capillary or tubing to
rub against metal surfaces where
friction can cause damage.
When using a control with
1/4 in. / 6.4 mm tubing, a pulsation
damper must be used. Pulsation can
cause excessive wear and damage
the control.
2. Connect the oil pressure line pump discharge to
the pressure connector labeled “OIL.”
3. Connect the crankcase pressure line to the
pressure connector labeled “LOW.”
4. Coil and secure excess capillary or tubing to
avoid vibration.
Wiring
!
Use only the mounting screws
supplied with the control. Damage to
internal components may occur if
other screws are used.
Use the two mounting screw holes located on the
back of the control case to mount the control directly
to a wall or panel board. Mount the control so that
the pressure connections on the bellows are above
the crankcase liquid level of the equipment being
controlled.
Avoid sharp bends or kinks in the
capillary or tubing to avoid damage to
the capillary.
1. Purge all tubing and lines before connecting the
pressure control.
The P28 and P128 controls are not position sensitive
and can be mounted in any position.
Note:
CAUTION: Equipment damage hazard.
●
●
●
WARNING: Shock hazard. Disconnect all
power supplies before making
wiring connections to avoid
electrical shock or damage to
the equipment.
Make all wiring connections using copper
conductors only.
Wire in accordance with National Electric Code
and local regulations. For maximum electrical
rating of the control, see the label inside the
control cover.
Use the terminal screws furnished (8-32 x 1/4 in.
binder head). Substitution of other screws may
cause faulty connections.
P—P28 and P128 Series Lube Oil Controls with Built-in Time Delay Relay Product/Technical Bulletin 3
See Figures 3 through 10 for typical wiring diagrams
or refer to the compressor manufacturer’s
specifications.
When a P28 or P128 is installed on a 440 or 550
VAC system, use an external step-down transformer
to provide either 120 or 240V to the pilot and time
delay relay circuits. The transformer must be of
sufficient volt ampere capacity to operate the motor
starter and the time delay relay. Table 1 presents
the power requirements for the P28 or P128 time
delay relay. Table 2 presents the electrical ratings.
When the P28 or P128 control is supplied with a
Terminal 3, it may be wired to operate a runlight for
indicating when there is sufficient net oil pressure.
When the control is supplied with a Terminal A, it can
be wired to operate a shutdown alarm or signal for
indicating when the compressor has tripped.
Table 1: Electrical Power Required for
Time Delay Relay
For applications using a 208V control circuit, it is
suggested that one leg of the 208V circuit and a
neutral or ground wire be used as a 120V source to
power the time delay relay.
Voltage
Timing in Seconds
12, 24, or 120V
240V
30, 45, 60, 90, or 120
15 VA
30 VA
Table 2: Electrical Ratings--Pilot Duty
Time Delay Relay
Circuit
Pilot Circuit
Alarm Circuit*
Crankcase Heater**
(Terminal 1)
Runlight**
(Terminal 3)
120/240 VAC
750 VA, 120/240 VAC
10W Tungsten, 120/240 VAC
10 Ampere, 120 VAC
5 Ampere, 240 VAC
10W Tungsten
24 VAC/VDC
12 VAC/VDC
125 VA, 24 VAC
57.5 VA, 24 VDC
125 VA, 24 VAC
57.5 VA, 24 VDC
--
10W Tungsten
* Must be the same voltage as the pilot circuit.
** Must be the same voltage as the time delay relay circuit.
L ow
3
1
PC2
L ow Volta ge M od els
L ow
1 20 /24 0 M od els
2 40
P C 1 TD 2
2
H
3
1
L
TD 1
M
A
PC 2
P C 1 TD 2
2
H
L
TD 1
M
A
2 4*
1 20
DR
O il
O il
*1 2 vo lt also ava ilab le .
P C 1 - P re ssu re actu ated con ta cts. O pe n on increa se in pre ssu re differe nce be tw e en o il an d lo w p ressure con ntecto rs. M a ke s
a nd brea ks tim e de la y he ate r circu it.
P C 2 - C o nta cts clo se sim ulta ne ou sly w he n P C 1 co ntacts o pe n (run ligh t circu it).
TD 1 - Tim e d elay re la y. C on ta cts op en a fte r tim e d elay interval if p ressure d ffere nce be tw e en o il an d lo w p ressure con ne ctors
is n ot e sta b lish ed or m ainta in ed.
TD 2 - C o nta cts clo se sim ulta ne ou sly whe n TD 1 co n tacts o pe n (alarm circu it).
D R - Vo ltag e dro pp in g resisto r u se d in d ua l vo lta ge m od e ls.
H - H e ate r for tim e de la y relay.
C o nn ect Te rm in als L a nd M a s a sing le po le sw itch .
C o nn ect Te rm in als 2 a nd 2 40 o r 1 20 to e ne rgize circu it on ly w h en m otor sta rte r is closed .
Figure 3: P28 or P128 Internal Wiring Circuit, Showing Alarm Circuit and Runlight Terminals
4 P—P28 and P128 Series Lube Oil Controls with Built-in Time Delay Relay Product/Technical Bulletin
A d ditio na l co ntrols in th is line o nly.
2 40 V 3 -ph ase
L1
C ra nkcase
H e ate r
W h e n U se d*
L2
A n y Vo lta ge
G ro un d
1 20 or 24 0V
S u pp ly
Hot
L3
O pe ra tin g
C o ntrol
C2
T1
L
2
M
L3
C3
R u nlig ht
if U sed
2 40
3
T3
T2
L2
C4
C ra nkcase
H e ate r
W h e n U se d*
2 40
1
L1
1
A larm
if U sed
M otor
A
1 20
L
M
2 *
T1
2 40 or
1 20 V
A d ditio na l co ntrols
in th is lin e on ly.
1 20
P 2 8 or P 12 8
P 2 8 or P 12 8
T3
M otor
O pe ra tin g
C o ntrol
A
T2
*C ra nkcase he ate r ca nn ot be cycled w ith this ho okup . S e e F ig ure 5 .
*W h e n cra nkcase he ater is use d, discon n ect jum p er from 2 to M
a nd re co n ne ct fro m 2 to L.
Figure 4: P28 or P128 Used on a 240V System with
240V Magnetic Starter Coil
Figure 6: P28 or P128 Where Separate Supply is
Provided for Control Circuit (Jumper between
2 and M [or L] must be field installed.)
A d ditio na l co ntrols in th is line o nly.
L1
C ra nkcase
H e ate r
W h e n U se d*
R u nligh t
if U sed
4 40 V
3 -ph ase
2 40 V 3 -ph ase
L2
L3
2 40 V
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
C2
O pe ra tin g
C o ntrol
C ra nkcase
H e ate r
W h e n U se d*
2 40
R u nligh t
if U sed
3
A larm
if U sed
4 40 V
C3
2 40
1 L
2* M
A
T1
T2
T3
3
1
M o tor
1 20
P 2 8 or P 12 8
*W h e n cra nkcase he ate r is used , d iscon ne ct ju m pe r from 2 to M
a nd re co nn ect from 2 to L .
Figure 5: P28 or P128 Wired for 3-wire Control
(Jumper between 2 and M [or L] must be field
installed.)
A larm
if U sed
L
M
2*
A
1 20
P 2 8 or P 12 8
O pe ra tin g
C o ntro l
M otor
A d ditio na l co ntrols
in th is lin e o nly.
*W h en cra nkca se h ea te r is u sed , d iscon ne ct ju m p e r 2 to M
a nd reco nn ect 2 to L . A lso, m ake su re th at co ntrol circuit
tra nsfo rm er ha s su fficie nt ou tp ut for ad ditio n al lo ad .
Figure 7: P28 or P128 Wired for 440V Supply
and 240V Magnetic Start Coil (Also for 550V
Using Proper Transformer) (Jumper between
2 and M [or L] must be field installed.)
P—P28 and P128 Series Lube Oil Controls with Built-in Time Delay Relay Product/Technical Bulletin 5
2 40 V
3 -ph ase
L1
S tart
L2
C o m p re ssor
L3
O pe ra tin g 2 40 V
C o ntrol
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
M otor
C2
C ra nkcase
H e ate r
W h e n U se d*
L ow
C3
R u nlig ht
if U sed
P 7 4A A
L ow
P 2 8/P 12 8
1
240
L
S top
2
M
2 40
O il
O il
3
1
L
T1
T3
Jun ctio n B ox
2 * M
A larm
if U sed
T2
M otor
A
N o te: Th is system w o uld p ro vide shu td ow n o n low
lu be o il pressu re in e ith er of tw o com presso rs
o pe rated by the com m on m otor.
A d ditio n al co ntrols
in th is lin e on ly.
1 20
P 2 8 or P 12 8
*W h e n cra nkcase he ater is use d, disco nn ect jum p er fro m 2 to M
a nd re con ne ct 2 to L.
Figure 8: P28 or P128 Where Manual “Start-Stop”
Pushbutton Station is Used (Jumper between
2 and M [or L] must be field installed.)
L1
A larm
if U sed
1
L
2
M
L3
!
T1
T2
T3
M otor
A
2 4*
P 2 8 or P 12 8
The P28 and P128 controls are shipped with a cut-out
pressure differential of 9 psi (62 kPa). However, the
controls can be adjusted according to the compressor
manufacturer’s specifications.
When the controls are shipped as an
accessory to the compressor unit, time delay
and cut-out pressure are set to manufacturer’s
specifications. Replacement controls should
duplicate the manufacturer’s specifications.
S ta rte r C o il
O pe ra tin g
C o ntro l
3
L2
Adjustments
Note:
2 40 V
3 -ph ase
Tra nsfo rm er
Figure 10: P28 or P128 and P74AA Wired for an
Oil Pressure Control System Where One Motor
Operates Two Compressors
A d ditio na l co ntrols
in th is lin e o nly.
*12 volt a lso ava ila ble.
Figure 9: P28 or P128 Where 24V Control Circuit
Power is from a Step-down Transformer (Jumper
between 2 and M must be field installed.)
CAUTION: Equipment damage hazard.
To avoid damage to the
compressor, obtain the
compressor manufacturer’s net
oil bearing pressure
specifications as soon as
possible. If necessary, reset the
cut-out pressure difference to the
manufacturer’s specifications.
When the manufacturer’s specifications are not known,
proceed as follows to set the cut-out pressure
differential:
1. With the compressor running, read the oil pressure
and the crankcase pressure.
2. Subtract the crankcase pressure reading from the
oil pressure pump discharge reading. This is the
net oil pressure to the bearings.
6 P—P28 and P128 Series Lube Oil Controls with Built-in Time Delay Relay Product/Technical Bulletin
3. Set the cut-out pointer 6 to 8 psi (41 to 55 kPa)
below the established running net oil pressure with
the Adjusting Disk using a standard screwdriver.
3. Apply power to start the compressor. The time
delay relay should trip after the time interval and
stop the compressor.
To increase the cut-out pressure, turn the
Adjusting Disk counterclockwise. To decrease,
turn clockwise.
4. Remove power from the control and remove the
jumper between Terminals 1 and 2.
To raise the pressure differential, turn the
Adjusting Disk (see Figure 2) to the left when
viewing the front of the control. Turn the adjusting
disk to the right to lower the pressure differential.
6. Manually reset the time delay relay if required.
C heckout Procedure
T est for Shutdown
Before leaving the installation, observe at least
three complete operating cycles to be sure that all
components are functioning correctly.
Immediately after installing, and at regular intervals
thereafter, the time delay relay should be tested to
verify that all circuits are operating correctly.
!
5. Replace the cover on the control and apply power.
F ungus Proofing
WARNING: Shock hazard. Disconnect
power from the control before
testing for shutdown to avoid
electrical shock or damage to
the equipment.
Fungus proofing can be supplied at extra cost when
specified. Conforms to government specifications
MIL-V-173A.
R epairs and Replacement
To test for shutdown:
Field repairs must not be made, except for
replacement of the time delay relay assembly. For a
replacement control or time delay relay assembly,
contact the nearest Johnson Controls representative or
Refrigeration Application Engineering at 414-274-5535.
1. Remove power from the control and remove the
control cover.
2. Connect a jumper between Terminals 1 and 2.
See Figure 3 for terminal locations.
Note:
If the control is mounted on a condensing
unit where air from auxiliary equipment
(blowers or fans) may strike the control,
the control cover should be replaced
before proceeding to Step 3.
Table 3: Replacement Time Delay Relay Assemblies
Part Number
Voltage
Reset Type
Timing in Seconds
Alarm Circuit
RLY13A-600R
120/240 VAC
Manual
60
No
RLY13A-602R
120/240 VAC
Manual
90
No
RLY13A-603R
120/240 VAC
Manual
90
Yes
RLY13A-608R
120/240 VAC
Automatic
90
No
RLY13A-609R
24 VAC/VDC
Manual
120
No
RLY13A-610R
120/240 VAC
Manual
30
No
RLY13A-616R
120/240 VAC
Manual
120
No
RLY13A-617R
120/240 VAC
Manual
45
No
P—P28 and P128 Series Lube Oil Controls with Built-in Time Delay Relay Product/Technical Bulletin 7
O rdering Information
Table 4: Ordering Information
Series Part
Number
Pressure
Connections*
Reset Type
Refrigerant
Time Delay
Relay Voltage
Alarm
Terminal
Runlight
Terminal
P28AA
Style 13, Style 5,
or Style 15
Manual
Non-corrosive
All-range
120/240 VAC
No
No
P128AA
Style 5
Manual
Non-corrosive
All-range
120/240 VAC
No
No
P28AN
Style 15
Manual
Ammonia
120/240 VAC
No
No
P28DA
Style 13
Manual
Non-corrosive
All-range
120/240 VAC
Yes
Yes
P28DN
Style 15
Manual
Ammonia
120/240 VAC
Yes
Yes
P28GA
Style 13
Automatic
Non-corrosive
All-range
120/240 VAC
No
No
P28NA
Style 13 or Style 5
Manual
Non-corrosive
All-range
24 VAC/VDC
No
No
P28PA
Style 5
Manual
Non-corrosive
All-range
24 VAC/VDC
No
No
* Style 5 connections are 1/4 in. / 6.4 mm SAE male flare connectors (no capillary tubing). Style 13 connections are 36 in. / 914 mm
capillary tubing and 1/4 in. / 6.4 mm flare nut. Style 15 connections are 1/4 in. / 6.4 mm female National Pipe Thread connectors.
S pecifications
Product
Power Requirements
Pressure Specifications
Pressure Switch Units
Ambient Operating Conditions
Material
Mounting
Wiring Terminal
Agency Listings
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Shipping Weight
P28 and P128 Series Lube Oil Controls with Built-in Time Delay Relay
See Tables 1 and 2.
Adjustable Cut-out Pressure Difference: 8 to 70 psi (55 to 483 kPa)*
Maximum Differential:
70 psi (483 kPa)
Maximum Working Pressure:
250 psig (1724 kPa) on the high side
Maximum Overpressure:
325 psi (2240 kPa) oil and low side pressure
*The time delay relay is de-energized 3 to 5 psi (21 to 34 kPa) above the cut-out scale setting.
Enclosed Dust-protected Pennswitch
32 to 104°F / 0 to 40°C
Case: 0.062 in. / 1.6 mm Galvanized Steel
Cover: 0.028 in. / 0.7 mm Cold Rolled Steel (plated and painted)
Flat Surface or with a Universal Mounting Bracket (Part No. 271-51)
Large 8-32 x 1/4 in. Binder Head Screws
UL Guide No. SDFY; File SA516**
CSA Class No. 1222 01; File LR948**
**Most models. Contact Johnson Controls for a complete listing.
5.66 x 5.32 x 2.09 in. / 144 x 135 x 53 mm
3.0 lb / 1.36 kg
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For application at conditions beyond these specifications,
consult the local Johnson Controls Refrigeration Application Engineering at (414) 274-5535. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages
resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.
Controls Group
507 E. Michigan Street
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
8 P—P28 and P128 Series Lube Oil Controls with Built-in Time Delay Relay Product/Technical Bulletin
FAN 125
Master Catalog
Printed in U.S.A.
Master Catalog
Temperature Controls Section
Product Bulletin
Issue Date
125
A
A70, A72
0996
A70, A72 Series Temperature Controls
for Refrigeration and Heating
Application
Features
The A70 single-pole and A72
two-pole controls are supplied in a
wide selection of ranges to meet
most application needs. See
“Temperature Ranges.”
•
Long life contact structure with
high contact force right up to
break -- no bounce on make.
•
Make reset models are
“trip-free”.
•
Ranges available to cover
most applications.
•
Auxiliary contact can be used
to actuate an alarm circuit
when the main contact opens.
•
Two-pole construction
provides a number of
application advantages (see
“General Description”).
•
Heavy gauge “low profile”
stainless steel element cup to
protect against mechanical
damage.
Models may be supplied to open
a circuit on temperature increase
or close a circuit on temperature
increase as required. An A70
single-pole control may optionally
include a separate reverse-acting
auxiliary contact. Models are
available with a SPDT enclosed
Pennswitch.
All Series A70, A72 controls are
designed for use only as
operating controls. Where an
operating control failure would
result in personal injury and/or
loss of property, it is the
responsibility of the installer to
add devices (safety, limit
controls) or systems (alarm,
supervisory systems) that
protect against, or warn of,
control failure.
Specifications
© 1996 Johnson Controls, Inc.
Code No. LIT-125155
Fig. 1 -- Single function
temperature control, Style 1.
General Description
The A70 controls provide
dependability and quality at
attractive prices. The A72 DPST
controls provide a number of
application advantages such as:
•
Control of polyphase motors
without use of magnetic
starters where protection
against overloading and single
phasing is otherwise provided.
•
Provides two separate control
circuits necessary for the
control of multiple systems.
•
One set of contacts breaks the
“hot” line when wired as a twopole switch in single-phase
circuits.
•
Permits control of two
separate load circuits.
•
Automatic control of heavy
electrical loads.
•
All A70, A72 controls have a
single calibrated scale which
shows directly both cut-in and
cutout settings. Adjustments
can be made readily without
removing the cover.
1
Optional Constructions
Covers
Metric Scale Plates
Adjusting Knobs
Standard finish is gray enamel.
Stainless steel covers available at
slight additional cost for exposed
installations.
Temperature models are available
with Celsius plates.
Adjustment Cutout Stops
Fungus Proofing
Cutout stops, factory set as
specified.
Supplied at extra cost, when
specified. Conforms to
government specifications
MIL-V-173A.
Controls are supplied less bracket
unless specified. Controls may
be supplied with mounting
brackets at additional cost. Part
No. 271-350 is standard.
May be supplied on differential or
range adjusting screw for limited
adjustment within specified limits.
Bulb and Capillary
Standard bulb and capillary are
copper. Stainless steel, monel
and steel bulbs are available, if
required. Bulb and capillary with
neoprene coating to military
specifications MIL-R-3065, Grade
SB-515-ABFF may be supplied at
additional cost. Capillary length
6 ft (1.8 m) only.
Mounting Brackets
Manual Reset
Provides lockout which requires
manual reset before a restart is
possible. Manual reset is “tripfree” and cannot be blocked or
tied down. Button must be
pressed and released before
operation will resume.
Fig. 2 -- Standard mounting
bracket
Bulb Wells
Temperature Elements
Supplied at extra cost, when
specified.
Standard temperature element
styles are shown on Page 5. For
styles other than shown, please
check with the nearest Johnson
Controls district office or
Customer Service.
Capillary Tubing
Standard temperature elements
supplied with 6 ft (1.8 m) capillary.
Extra length tube available at
additional cost. Longer capillary
tube supplied up to 10 feet (3 m)
in 2 foot (0.6 m) increments; over
10 feet (3 m) in 5 foot (1.5 m)
increments.
Type Number Selection
Type
Number
Main
Contact
Action
No.
of
Poles
Lockout
with
Manual
Reset
Contact Action
Open on rise or close on rise as
specified.
Knob
Conduit
Opening
Misc.
Single-Pole
A70AA
Open Low
1
No
No
1/2 in.
A70AQ
Open Low
1
No
Yes
1/2 in.
A70BA
Open Low
1
Yes
No
1/2 in.
Manual Start
A70DA
Open High
1
Yes
No
1/2 in.
A70GA
Open Low
1
No
No
1/2 in.
Reverse Acting
Aux. Contact
A70HA
Open Low
1
Yes
No
1/2 in.
Reverse Acting
Aux. Contact
A70JA
Open High
1
No
No
1/2 in.
Reverse Acting
Aux. Contact
A70KA
Open High
1
Yes
No
1/2 in.
Reverse Acting
Aux. Contact
Two-Pole
2 A70, A72 Product Bulletin
A72AA
Open Low
2
No
No
3/4 in.
A72AC
Open Low
2
No
No
3/4 in.
No Cover
A72AE
Open Low
2
No
No
3/4 in.
Outdoor Case
A72AP
Open Low
2
No
No
3/4 in.
Manual Start
A72CA
Open High
2
No
No
3/4 in.
A72CE
Open High
2
No
No
3/4 in.
Outdoor Case
Master Catalog
Pressure Controls Section
Product Bulletin
Issue Date
125
P
P74
0204
P74 Series
Differential Pressure Controls
Application
These differential pressure
controls are for use as operating
controls and/or indicating system
functions through display lights or
panels. They measure the
difference in pressure exerted
upon its two sensing elements.
The controls are available for
applications sensing air, oil or
liquid. Typical applications are
proof of flow across a chiller or
water cooled condenser, proof of
flow in a heating or cooling coil
and lube oil pressure sensing on
refrigeration compressors. On a
proof of flow application the
control measures pressure drop
across two different points in
either a closed water circulating
system or a city water to supply
system.
Specifications
Fig. 1: P74 Differential Pressure
Control with
Style 13 elements.
On a proof of flow application in a
water chiller system the control
activates a light or signal to
indicate a loss of water.
The control may also be applied
as a lube oil pressure sensing
control on refrigeration
compressors. They may be used
in combination with P28 and/or
P45 oil pressure cutout controls
on two compressor, single motor
units to reduce the oil system
cost. (See Fig. 4.) Special low
pressure models are available for
variable speed and screw
compressor oil pressure
applications.
All Series P74 differential
pressure controls are designed
for use only as operating
controls. Where an operating
control failure would result in
personal injury and/or loss of
property, it is the responsibility
of the installer to add devices
(safety, limit controls) or
systems (alarm, supervisory
systems) that protect against,
or warn of, control failure.
© 2004 Johnson Controls, Inc.
Part No. 997-545, Rev. C
Code No. LIT-125490
1
Range and Differential Specifications
Features
•
Heavy duty, low profile
elements withstand unduly
high overrun pressures that
may be encountered in
shipment or in some machine
rooms.
•
Lockout models have a
“trip-free” manual reset.
•
Long life contact structure with
high contact force -- no
contact bounce.
•
Single unit mounting and
wiring -- saves installation time
and material.
General Description
Single and double pole models
are available with contacts that
open on a pressure differential
increase or close on a pressure
differential increase. Also
available are models with singlepole, double-throw enclosed
contacts or with main and
separate reverse-acting auxiliary
contacts. Controls with lockout
feature require manual reset to
reclose circuit after lockout. The
“trip-free” reset will not permit
restart until reset button is pushed
and released.
The operation point of the control
is readily adjusted by rotating the
adjusting disk. The control set
points are easily read on a
calibrated scale.
2 P74 Product Bulletin
Electrical Ratings
Optional Constructions
Pressure Elements
Regularly supplied for noncorrosive refrigerants (fluorinated
hydrocarbons). Available for
ammonia service with 1/4 in. 18 FNPT connector (See Style
Chart, Fig. 2.)
Pressure Connectors
Standard controls supplied with 36
in. capillary tubing with 1/4 in. flare
nut (Style 13). Controls with 1/4
in. SAE male flare connector (no
capillary tubing, Style 5),
36 in. capillary tubing with 1/4 in.
sweat section (Style 34), or 1/4 in.
FNPT connector (Style 15) may
be supplied on quantity orders
(see Pressure Element Styles).
Fig. 3: Typical proof of flow hookup.
2.
Complete Product Number, if
available.
3.
If complete Product Number
is not available, specify Type
Number (see Specifications
table) and the following.
4.
Type of refrigerant or fluid.
Repairs and Replacement
Field repairs must not be made.
For a replacement control, contact
the nearest Johnson Controls
distributor.
Fig. 2: Pressure element styles
available on the P74. Style 13 is
standard. Other styles shown above
can be supplied on quantity orders.
a.
Non-corrosive.
b.
Ammonia.
Ordering Information
5.
Style of pressure connector.
To order, specify:
6.
Optional constructions.
1.
7.
Setting -- contacts close at
____ and open at ____.
Quantity required.
Fig. 4: Typical wiring diagram showing the P74AA and a P28
on a motor operating two compressors.
P74 Product Bulletin 3
Performance specifications appearing herein are nominal and are subject to
accepted manufacturing tolerances and application variables.
Controls Group
507 E. Michigan Street
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53202
4 P74 Product Bulletin
Printed in U.S.A.
Bulletin C401d
March, 2002
HANSEN TECHNOLOGIES
CORPORATION
Specifications, Applications,
Service Instructions & Parts
HCK4 IN-LINE
CHECK VALVES
5
/ 8" thru 4" PORT
(16 thru 100 mm)
Flanged
/ 8" thru 4"
FPT, SW, WN, ODS
for refrigerants
3
HCK4-4 Check Valve
INTRODUCTION
KEY FEATURES
The HCK4 series of dependable, compact, rugged
in-line check valves (disc type non-return valves) is
ideally suited for refrigerant flow control applications.
Valves open wide for flow in the arrow direction on
the valve body.
Valves close quickly and
reliably when flow reversals occur.
Plated bodies and stainless steel seat discs and
springs enable them to withstand expected
industrial refrigeration conditions. Furthermore, these
check valves can be mounted in any position, closecoupled to other valves, and use same flanges as
Parker R/S, Frick, and Henry.
ADVANTAGES
These compact check valves offer reliable operation
regardless of position. Corrosion resistant stainless
steel seat disc. Metal-to-metal seats facilitate durable,
tight closing of valves.
APPLICATIONS
These in-line check valves are designed to provide
refrigerant flow control to hot gas lines, liquid lines,
compressor discharge lines, suction lines, and hot
gas heated drain pans.
These valves are not recommended for use with
pulsating loads such as low speed compressor
discharge and screw compressor side port
applications. For applications such as these, use
Hansen HCK1 piston type check valves.
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Mounts in any position
Less than 1 PSID wide opening pressure
Can be close-coupled
Low bubble leakage tolerance
For Ammonia, R22, R134a, and other approved
refrigerants
Dimensionally replaces R/S CK4A-2, -3, -4, -8, & -1
U.L. Listed
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
INSTALLATION
Body:
5 / 8 " thru 1¼": Steel, ASTM A108, zinc chromate
plated
1½" thru 4": Ductile iron, ASTM A536, zinc
chromate plated
Seat Disc: Stainless steel
Seat Cartridge:
5 / 8 " thru 1¼": Stainless steel, ASTM A582
1½" thru 4": Steel, ASTM A108, zinc chromate
plated
Spring: Stainless steel
Safe Working Pressure: 400 PSIG (27 bar)
Operating Temperature: -60F to 240F (-50 to 115°C)
Valve may be located in any position. Arrow on
valve body should match direction of flow. Secure
valve with gaskets between flanges and tighten
bolts evenly. Do not use this valve or any component
to align pipes or tighten gap between flanges.
Do not install on inlet side of solenoid valves or
control valves with electric shut-off or shut-off valves
unless a relief valve is used from therein between
piping. Do not install on inlet side of outlet pressure
regulators where liquid may become trapped.
Instead, check valves should be located on outlet
side of these valves. Check valves can be closecoupled to other matching solenoid valves, pressure
regulators, or strainers by using a Male Adapter
Ring and longer bolts supplied when so specified
on order.
INSTALLATION DIMENSIONS
D = Socket Weld Depth
J = Weld Neck
K = ODS Solder
%*.&/4*0/ )$, )$, )$, )$, )$, )$, )$, )$,
/ "
-&55&3 1035
Ñ1035 1035 ž1035 ¡1035 1035 ¡1035 1035
5 8
)$,
1035
2.50"
(64 mm)
3.19"
(81 mm)
3.50"
(89 mm)
0.38"
(10 mm)
1.03"
(26 mm)
1.50"
(38 mm)
1.56"
(40 mm)
3.25"
(83 mm)
4.50"
(114 mm)
4.50"
(114 mm)
0.50"
(13 mm)
1.22"
(31 mm)
2.37"
(60 mm)
2.50"
(64 mm)
3.25"
(83 mm)
4.50"
(114 mm)
4.50"
(114 mm)
0.50"
(13 mm)
1.22"
(31 mm)
2.37"
(60 mm)
2.50"
(64 mm)
3.25"
(83 mm)
4.50"
(114 mm)
4.50"
(114 mm)
0.50"
(13 mm)
1.22"
(31 mm)
2.37"
(60 mm)
2.50"
(64 mm)
5.06"
(129 mm)
4.56"
(116 mm)
6.38"
(162 mm)
0.75"
(19 mm)
2.56"
(65 mm)
3.62"
(92 mm)
4.56"
(116 mm)
5.06"
(129 mm)
4.56"
(116 mm)
6.38"
(162 mm)
0.75"
(19 mm)
2.56"
(65 mm)
3.62"
(92 mm)
4.56"
(116 mm)
6.06"
(154 mm)
6.00"
(152 mm)
7.50"
(191 mm)
1.00"
(25 mm)
2.92"
(74 mm)
4.84"
(123 mm)
6.00"
(152 mm)
6.06"
(154 mm)
6.00"
(152 mm)
7.50"
(191 mm)
1.00"
(25 mm)
2.92"
(74 mm)
4.84"
(123 mm)
6.00"
(152 mm)
6.39"
(162 mm)
7.13"
(181 mm)
8.00"
(203 mm)
1.00"
(25 mm)
3.50"
(89 mm)
6.06"
(154 mm)
7.13"
(181 mm)
2.19"
(56 mm)
3.12"
(79 mm)
3.12"
(79 mm)
3.12"
(79 mm)
3.06"
(78 mm)
3.06"
(78 mm)
4.00"
(102 mm)
4.12"
(105 mm)
5.00"
(127 mm)
3.26"
(83 mm)
0.33"
(8 mm)
4"
(102 mm)
0.49"
(12 mm)
4"
(102 mm)
0.59"
(15 mm)
4"
(102 mm)
0.62"
(16 mm)
6.06"
(154 mm)
0.71"
(18 mm)
6.06"
(154 mm)
0.87"
(22 mm)
7.06"
(179 mm)
0.96"
(24 mm)
7.06"
(179 mm)
1.08"
(27 mm)
9.89"
(251 mm)
1.40"
(36 mm)
Valve Cv (Kv)
5.8 (5)
8.2 (7)
11.7 (10)
14.0 (12)
39 (33)
50 (43)
74 (63)
93 (80)
210 (180)
Pipe Size
½", ¾"
¾"
1"
1¼"
1½"
2"
2½"
3"
4"
A
B
C
D
E=
F
G
H
J
K
*Dimensionally replaces R/S check valve models CK4A-2, -3, -4, -8, and -1. = "E" dimension is check valve body outside
edge to outside edge. Flange groove depth: nominal 0.12" each of two; gasket thickness: nominal 0.06" each of two.
2
PARTS LIST
HCK4-2
*5&.
(2-BOLT)
HCK4-2
%&4$3*15*0/
25:
1"35/0
1
1
1
1
2
1
72-0069
72-0070
72-0068
72-0071
70-0065
72-0067
2
2
2
70-0225
70-0055
FACTORY
(2-BOLT)
7BMWF"TTFNCMZ,JU
Above Kit Consists of:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Seat Disc
Closing Spring
Seat Cartridge
Seat Cartridge O-ring
Flange Gasket
Body, HCK4-2
Bolt ( 7/ 16" - 14 x 3.25")
Nut (7/ 16 " - 14)
Flange (FPT, SW, WN, ODS)
HCK4-3, -4, -5
*5&.
Socket weld shown. FPT, weld neck, ODS: available.
(2-BOLT)
%&4$3*15*0/
25:
1"35/0
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
72-0006
70-0204
72-0002
72-0003
70-0132
72-0004
72-0008
72-0001
2
2
2
72-0005
70-0136
FACTORY
7BMWF"TTFNCMZ,JU
Above Kit Consists of:
1
2
3
4
5
6a
6b
6c
7
8
9
Seat Disc
Closing Spring
Seat Cartridge
Seat Cartridge O-ring
Flange Gasket
Body, HCK4-3
Body, HCK4-4
Body, HCK4-5
Bolt ( 5/ 8" -11 x 4")
Nut ( 5/ 8" -11)
Flange (FPT, SW, WN, ODS)
HCK4-7, -8, -9, -0, -1
*5&.
1a
1b
1c
2a
2b
2c
3a
3b
3c
3d
4a
4b
4c
5a
5b
5c
5d
6a
6b
6c
6d
6e
7a
7b
7c
8a
8b
8c
9
HCK4-3, -4, -5
(2-BOLT)
(4-BOLT)
%&4$3*15*0/
Seat Disc 1½", 2"
Seat Disc 2½", 3"
Seat Disc 4"
Closing Spring 1½", 2"
Closing Spring 2½", 3"
Closing Spring 4"
Seat Cartridge 1½", 2"
Seat Cartridge 2½"
Seat Cartridge 3"
Seat Cartridge 4"
Seat Cartridge O-ring 1½", 2"
Seat Cartridge O-ring 2½", 3"
Seat Cartridge O-ring 4"
Flange Gasket 1½", 2"
Flange Gasket 2½"
Flange Gasket 3"
Flange Gasket 4"
Body, HCK4-7
Body, HCK4-8
Body, HCK4-9
Body, HCK4-0
Body, HCK4-1
Bolt, HCK4-7, -8 (5/8" - 11 x 6")
Bolt, HCK4-9, -0 (¾" - 10 x 7")
Bolt, HCK4-1 ( 7/ 8" - 9 x 7.5")
Nut, HCK4-7, -8 ( 5/ 8" - 11)
Nut, HCK4-9, -0 (¾" - 10)
Nut, HCK4-1 (7/ 8" - 9)
Flange (FPT, SW, WN, ODS)
25:
1"35/0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
72-0016
72-0034
72-0053
72-0021
72-0032
72-0048
72-0020
72-0029
72-0028
72-0047
72-0017
72-0027
72-0049
75-0138
75-0125
75-0137
75-0253
72-0042
72-0019
72-0025
72-0026
72-0046
70-0268
72-0033
72-0051
70-0136
75-0210
75-0280
FACTORY
Socket weld shown. FPT, weld neck, ODS: available.
HCK4-7, -8, -9, -0, -1
(4-BOLT)
Socket weld shown. Weld neck, ODS: available.
3
OPERATION
WARRANTY
HCK4 check valves are normally closed valves. As
inlet pressure increases, it overcomes the closing
spring force. As the seat disc is pushed back and
away from the seat cartridge, flow through the valve
occurs. The valve will remain open until the inlet
pressure drops below the closing spring force or
there is a flow reversal, at which time the seat disc
will close against the seat cartridge, preventing
reverse flow.
Hansen valves are guaranteed against defective
materials or workmanship for one year F.O.B. our
plant. No consequential damages or field labor is
included.
ORDERING INFORMATION,
HCK4 CHECK VALVES
5:1&
SIZING
Check valves are normally selected on the basis of
line size. However, for gas flow applications at low
load conditions, a minimum of 1 psid across the
valve is essential. This will maintain valve at full
open position. Valve Cv (Kv) is listed in the
installation dimension table on page 2. Factory valve
sizing assistance is available.
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
These valves are a reliable part of a refrigeration
system. However, if valve does not appear to be
operating satisfactorily, isolate it from the refrigeration
system. Remove all refrigerant from associated piping
and valves. Follow the guidelines in the caution
section. Loosen each flange nut on the check valve.
Break each flange gasket seal. Carefully loosen
flange bolts one at a time, being cautious to avoid
any refrigerant which still may be present. Remove
check valve from flanges and inspect. Lapped seating
surfaces should be smooth and free of pits or
scratches.
To confirm valve operation, move seat disc with
eraser end of pencil. Movement should be free from
friction. If not, disassemble and visually inspect for
dirt in valve or burrs on seat disc. Clean or replace
parts as necessary. Valve discs and seats can be
restored by lapping on a flat plate.
HCK4-2*
HCK4-3*
1035
4*;&
NN
5 8
'-"/(&$0//&$5*0/
45:-&4*;&4
'15488/
0%4
45%
"-40
45%
/"
(16)
½"
¾"
(20)
¾"
/ ", ¾"
5 8
1", 1¼"
7 8
3 8
/ "
/ "
HCK4-4*
1"
(25)
1"
¾", 1¼"
1 1/ 8"
HCK4-5
1¼"
(32)
1¼"
¾", 1"
1 3/ 8"
HCK4-7
1½"
(40)
1½"
2"
1 5/ 8"
HCK4-8*
2"
(50)
2"
1½"
2 1/ 8"
HCK4-9
2½"
(65)
2½"
3"
2 5/ 8"
HCK4-0
3"
(80)
3"
--
3 1/ 8"
HCK4-1*
4"
(100)
4"
--
4 1/ 8"
* Replaces R/S CK4A-2, CK4A-3, CK4A-4, CK4A-8, & CK4A-1.
HCK4-2 close-couples to HS6 & HS8 Solenoid Valves.
HCK4-3, -4, & -5 close-couples to HS7 Solenoid Valve.
FPT available only 3/ 8" to 1¼".
TO ORDER: Specify valve type, connection style and
size, and close-coupling information if needed.
TYPICAL SPECIFICATIONS
"Refrigeration in-line check valves shall have steel
or ductile iron bodies, stainless steel seat discs,
stainless steel closing springs, and be suitable for
a safe working pressure of 400 PSIG, as manufactured
by Hansen Technologies Corporation type HCK4 or
approved equal."
Typical close-coupling to solenoid valve.
Reassemble valve and insert between flanges.
Replace and tighten bolts and nuts evenly. Carefully
check for leaks before returning to service.
CAUTION
Hansen check valves are only for refrigeration
systems. These instructions and related safety
precautions must be completely read and understood
before selecting, using, or servicing these valves.
Only knowledgeable, trained refrigeration mechanics
should install, operate, or service these valves. Stated
temperature and pressure limits should not be
exceeded. Valves should not be removed unless
system has been evacuated to zero pressure. See
also Safety Precautions in current List Price Bulletin
and Safety Precautions Sheet supplied with product.
Escaping refrigerant might cause personal injury,
particularly to the eyes and lungs.
ISO 9002
Hansen Technologies Corp.
Burr Ridge, IL Cert. # 000472
Orlando, FL Cert. # 001523
HANSEN TECHNOLOGIES
CORPORATION
6827 High Grove Boulevard
Burr Ridge, Illinois 60527 U.S.A.
Telephone: (708) 325-1565 FAX: (708) 325-1572
Toll-free: 1-800-426-7368
© 1995 Hansen Technologies Corporation
Printed in U.S.A.
SECTION
A1
WOOD’S
SURE-GRIP
QD BUSHINGS
TM
• Provide a True Clamp Fit
• Are Easy to Install and Remove
• Permit Four-Way Mounting
A1–1
SURE-GRIP BUSHING FEATURES
Sure-Grip® “Quick Detachable” bushings are easy to install
and remove. They are split through flange and taper to provide a
true clamp on the shaft that is the equivalent of a shrink fit. All
sizes except JA and QT have a setscrew over the key to help
6-hole drilling (most sizes)
makes installation and
removal quick
and easy.
Precise taper (3/4 in. per ft. on diameter)
provides proper wedging action.
Saw cut through flange and
taper (and sometimes cut
down into keyway also) to
provide a true clamp fit.
Cap screws used to
secure bushings to
sheave and to remove
bushing from sheave.
maintain the bushing’s position on the shaft until the cap screws
are securely tightened. Sure-Grip bushings have a very gradual
taper (3/4-inch taper per ft. on the diameter) which is about half
the inclined angle of many other bushings. The result is the
Sure-Grip securely clamps the shaft, with twice the force of
those competitive bushings, to provide extreme holding power.
Versatile Sure-Grip bushings permit the mounting of the same
mating part on shafts of different diameters, and the mounting
of different sheaves on the same shaft using the same bushing.
Their interchangeability extends through sheaves, pulleys,
timing pulleys, sprockets, flexible and rigid couplings, made-toorder items by Wood’s, and to product lines of several other
mechanical power transmission manufacturers.
Keyseat 180°
from split.
Sure-Grip bushings are manufactured with the drilled and
tapped holes located at a precise distance from the keyseat;
thus, a wide mating part having a bushing in each end can be
mounted on a common shaft with the two keyways in line. This
feature not only facilitates installation but also permits both
bushings to carry an equal share of the load.
STANDARD MOUNTING
REVERSE MOUNTING
1.
3.
Cap screws from outside
through drilled holes in
the mating part and into
threaded holes in the
bushing flange located on
the inside of the assembly.
Or the complete assembly
reversed on the shaft and;
A1–2
2.
Cap screws from inside
through drilled holes in
the mating part and into
threaded holes in the
bushing flange located on
the outside of the assembly.
Cap screws from inside
through drilled holes in the
bushing flange located on
the inside of the assembly
and into threaded holes in
the mating part.
4.
Cap screws from outside
through drilled holes in the
bushing flange located on
the outside of the assembly
and into threaded holes in
the mating part.
SURE-GRIP BUSHING DIMENSIONS
Sure-Grip bushings are designed to transmit the rated torque capacity listed in the table below when the cap screws are tightened as
indicated. The bushings are stocked in all popular bore sizes, including metric bores, within the bore range for a particular bushing.
Bushing
QT
Bushings
JA to J inclusive
w/Setscrew
Except JA
Bushings
M to S inclusive
w/Setscrew
SURE-GRIP BUSHING
TORQUE RATINGS AND DIMENSIONS
Bush.
QT
JA
SH
SDS
SD
Torque
Capacity
(In.-Lbs.)
(Note 1) (Note 2)
Max.
Max.
Bore
Bore
1
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
Cap
Screws
Required
A
B
D
E
F*
L
Bolt
Circle
/
/
3/8
7/16
7/16
1.625
1.375
1.871
2.1875
2.1875
21/2
2
2 11/16
3 3/16
3 3/16
1
/
7/8
7/8
1 3/8
/
/
13/16
3/4
11/4
11/4
1
11/4
1 5/16
113/16
2
1 21/32
21/4
2 11/16
2 11/16
2-1/4 x 1
3 - #10 x 1
3 -1/4 x 13/8
3 -1/4 x 13/8
3 -1/4 x 1 7/8
2.8125
3.125
3.834
4.4375
5.1484
3 7/8
4 5/8
6
6 5/8
7 1/4
1 3/8
11/2
1 7/8
2 13/16
3 1/2
11/4
11/4
1 5/8
2 1/2
3 3/16
1 7/8
2
2 5/8
3 5/8
4 1/2
3 5/16
3 7/8
5
5 5/8
6 1/4
3 - 5/16 x 2
3 - 3/8 x 2
3 - 1/2 x 2 3/4
3 - 9/16 x 3 5/8
3 - 5/8 x 4 1/2
9 1/8
10
11 3/4
15
17 3/4
5 1/2
6 5/8
7 5/8
9 3/8
12 1/2
5 3/16
6 1/4
7 1/4
9
12
6 3/4
8 1/8
9 3/8
11 3/8
15 3/4
7 7/8
8 1/2
10
12 3/4
15
4 - 3/4 x 6 3/4
4 - 7/8 x 8
4 - 1 x 9 1/2
4 - 1 1/8 x 111/2
5 - 11/4 x 151/2
1,750
1,750
3,500
5,000
5,000
1 ⁄2
1
1 ⁄4
5
1 ⁄8
15
1 ⁄16
15
1 ⁄16
30
23
36
42
42
SK
SF
E
F
J
7,000
11,000
20,000
40,000
55,000
2 1/2
215/16
3 1/2
315/16
4 1/2
56
63
78
90
105
/
/
3/4
13/16
1
M
N
P
W
S
125,000
150,000
250,000
375,000
625,000
5 1/2
6
7
8 1/2
10
130
140
160
200
240
11/4
11/2
1 3/4
2
3 1/4
1 4
5 16
1 2
1 2
6.500
7.000
8.250
10.437
12.125
11 16
7 8
9 16
* Mating hub length.
1. MAX INCH BORE WITH KEYSEAT.
2. MAX MM BORE WITH STANDARD KEYSEAT.
See pages A1–4 to A1–8 for Bore and Keyseat information and weights.
A1–3
SURE-GRIP BUSHINGS
BORE AND KEYSEAT DIMENSIONS
(Inches)
Sure-Grip Bushings are available from stock with all the bores and keyseats listed below. In some cases, as the
bore increases in diameter, a shallow keyseat is provided—due to insufficient metal thickness. When this
happens, Wood’s furnishes the correct rectangular key to suit at no charge. This does not affect the bushing’s
ability to transmit the load. The rectangular key, or flat key as some call it, fits into the standard keyway in the
shaft.
Product
No.
Bore
Key Seat
Wt.
(*)
Product
No.
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
SH1116
SH118
SH1316
SH114
SH1516
SH138
SH1716
SH112
SH1916
SH158
SH11116
QT BUSHINGS
QTMPB
QT12
QT9/16
QT58
QT11/16
QT34
QT13/16
QT78
QT15/16
QT1
QT1116
QT118
QT1316
QT114
QT1516
QT138
QT1716
QT112
7/16
1/2
9/16
5/8
11/16
3/4
13/16
7/8
15/16
1
1-1/16
1-1/8
1-3/16
1-1/4
1-5/16
1-3/8
1-7/16
1-1/2
No KS
1/8 x 1/16
1/8 x 1/16
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
5/16 x 1/16
5/16 x 1/16
3/8 x 1/16
3/8 x 1/16
1/2
1/2
9/16
5/8
11/16
3/4
13/16
7/8
15/16
1
1-1/16
1-1/8
1-3/16
1-1/4
No KS
1/8 x 1/16
1/8 x 1/16
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/16
1/4 x 1/16
1/4 x 1/16
1/4 x 1/32
.8
.8
.8
.8
.8
.8
.8
.8
.8
.8
.8
.8
.8
.8
SH BUSHINGS
SHMPB
SH12
SH9/16
SH58
SH11/16
SH34
SH13/16
SH78
SH15/16
SH1
7/16
1/2
9/16
5/8
11/16
3/4
13/16
7/8
15/16
1
No KS
1/8 x 1/16
1/8 x 1/16
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
* Approximate weight in lbs.
A1–4
Key Seat
Wt.
(*)
Product
No.
.9
.9
.8
.8
.7
.7
.7
.6
.6
.5
.5
SD34
SD13/16
SD78
SD15/16
SD1
SD1116
SD118
SD1316
SD114
SD1516
SD138
SD13838KS
SD1716
SD112
SD1916
SD158
SD11116
SD134
SD11316
SD178
SD11516
SD2
SH BUSHINGS (continued)
JA BUSHINGS
JAMPB
JA12
JA9/16
JA58
JA11/16
JA34
JA13/16
JA78
JA15/16
JA1
JA1116
JA118
JA1316
JA114
Bore
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
.9
1-1/16
1-1/8
1-3/16
1-1/4
1-5/16
1-3/8
1-7/16
1-1/2
1-9/16
1-5/8
1-11/16
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
5/16 x 5/32
5/16 x 5/32
3/8 x 1/16
3/8 x 1/16
3/8 x 1/16
3/8 x 1/16
No KS
7/16
1/2
9/16
5/8
11/16
3/4
13/16
7/8
15/16
1
1-1/16
1-1/8
1-3/16
1-1/4
1-5/16
1-3/8
1-3/8
1-7/16
1-1/2
1-9/16
1-5/8
1-11/16
1-3/4
1-13/16
1-7/8
1-15/16
2
No KS
1/8 x 1/16
1/8 x 1/16
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
5/16 x 5/32
5/16 x 5/32
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 1/8
1/2 x 1/8
1/2 x 1/16
1/2 x 1/16
No KS
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.3
1.3
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.1
1.1
1.0
1.0
1.0
.9
.9
.8
.7
SD BUSHINGS
SDMPB
SD12
SD9/16
SD58
SD11/16
7/16
1/2
9/16
5/8
11/16
No KS
1/8 x 1/16
1/8 x 1/16
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
MPB Bushings are unsplit.
Key Seat
Wt.
(*)
SD BUSHINGS (continued)
SDS BUSHINGS
SDSMPB
SDS12
SDS9/16
SDS58
SDS11/16
SDS34
SDS13/16
SDS78
SDS15/16
SDS1
SDS1116
SDS118
SDS1316
SDS114
SDS1516
SDS138
SDS13838KS
SDS1716
SDS112
SDS1916
SDS158
SDS11116
SDS134
SDS11316
SDS178
SDS11516
SDS2
Bore
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.0
3/4
13/16
7/8
15/16
1
1-1/16
1-1/8
1-3/16
1-1/4
1-5/16
1-3/8
1-3/8
1-7/16
1-1/2
1-9/16
1-5/8
1-11/16
1-3/4
1-13/16
1-7/8
1-15/16
2
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
5/16 x 5/32
5/16 x 5/32
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 1/8
1/2 x 1/8
1/2 x 1/16
1/2 x 1/16
No KS
2.0
2.0
1.9
1.9
1.8
1.8
1.7
1.7
1.6
1.6
1.5
1.5
1.4
1.4
1.3
1.2
1.2
1.1
1.1
1.0
.9
.8
SK BUSHINGS
SKMPB
SK12
SK9/16
SK58
SK11/16
SK34
SK13/16
SK78
SK15/16
SK1
SK1116
SK118
SK1316
SK114
SK1516
SK151638KS
SK138
SK13838KS
SK1716
SK112
SK1916
SK158
SK11116
SK134
SK13412KS
7/16
1/2
9/16
5/8
11/16
3/4
13/16
7/8
15/16
1
1-1/16
1-1/8
1-3/16
1-1/4
1-5/16
1-5/16
1-3/8
1-3/8
1-7/16
1-1/2
1-9/16
1-5/8
1-11/16
1-3/4
1-3/4
No KS
1/8 x 1/16
1/8 x 1/16
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
5/16 x 5/32
3/8 x 3/16
5/16 x 5/32
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3.8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
1/2 x 1/4
3.6
3.6
3.6
3.6
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.4
3.4
3.3
3.3
3.2
3.2
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.0
3.0
2.9
2.9
2.8
2.7
2.6
2.5
2.5
(Continued—next page)
SURE-GRIP BUSHINGS
BORE AND KEYSEAT DIMENSIONS
(Inches)
Product
No.
Bore
Key Seat
Wt.
(*)
Product
No.
2.4
2.4
2.3
2.2
2.1
2.0
2.0
1.9
1.9
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.3
1.1
EMPB
E78
E15/16
E1
E118
E1316
E114
E1516
E138
E13838KS
E1716
E112
E1916
E158
E11116
E134
E11316
E178
E11516
E2
E2116
E218
E2316
E214
E21458KS
E2516
E238
E2716
E212
E2916
E258
E1116
E234
E21316
E278
E21516
E3
E318
E3316
E314
E3516
E338
E3716
E312
SK BUSHINGS (continued)
SK11316
SK178
SK11516
SK2
SK2116
SK218
SK2316
SK214
SK21458KS
SK2516
SK238
SK2716
SK212
SK2916
SK258
1-13/16
1-7/8
1-15/16
2
2-1/16
2-1/8
2-3/16
2-1/4
2-1/4
2-5/16
2-3/8
2-7/16
2-1/2
2-9/16
2-5/8
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/8
1/2 x 1/8
5/8 x 1/8
5/8 x 1/16
5/8 x 1/16
5/8 x 1/16
5/8 x 1/16
No KS
No KS
1/2
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
15/16
1
1-1/16
1-1/8
1-3/16
1-1/4
1-5/16
1-3/8
1-3/8
1-7/16
1-1/2
1-9/16
1-5/8
1-11/16
1-3/4
1-13/16
1-7/8
1-15/16
2
2-1/16
2-1/8
2-3/16
2-1/4
2-1/4
2-5/16
2-3/8
2-7/16
2-1/2
2-9/16
2-5/8
2-11/16
2-3/4
2-7/8
2-15/16
No KS
1/8 x 1/16
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
3/16 x 3/32
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
5/16 x 5/32
5/16 x 5/32
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 3/16
5/8 x 3/16
5/8 x 3/16
5/8 x 3/16
5/8 x 1/16
5/8 x 1/16
5/8 x 1/16
5/8 x 1/16
3/4 x 1/16
3/4 x 1/32
* Approximate weight in lbs.
Key Seat
Wt.
(*)
E BUSHINGS
SF BUSHINGS
SFMPB
SF12
SF58
SF34
SF78
SF15/16
SF1
SF1116
SF118
SF1316
SF114
SF1516
SF138
SF13838KS
SF1716
SF112
SF1916
SF158
SF11116
SF134
SF11316
SF178
SF11516
SF2
SF2116
SF218
SF2316
SF214
SF21458KS
SF2516
SF238
SF2716
SF212
SF2916
SF258
SF21116
SF234
SF278
SF21516
Bore
5.1
5.1
5.0
5.0
4.9
4.8
4.8
4.7
4.7
4.6
4.5
4.5
4.4
4.4
4.3
4.2
4.2
4.1
4.0
3.9
3.8
3.7
3.6
3.5
3.4
3.3
3.2
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.0
2.9
2.8
2.6
2.5
2.4
2.2
1.8
1.7
7/8
7/8
15/16
1
1-1/8
1-3/16
1-1/4
1-5/16
1-3/8
1-3/8
1-7/16
1-1/2
1-9/16
1-5/8
1-11/16
1-3/4
1-13/16
1-7/8
1-15/16
2
2-1/16
2-1/8
2-3/16
2-1/4
2-1/4
2-5/16
2-3/8
2-7/16
2-1/2
2-9/16
2-5/8
2-11/16
2-3/4
2-13/16
2-7/8
2-15/16
3
3-1/8
3-3/16
3-1/4
3-5/16
3-3/8
3-7/16
3-1/2
No KS
3/16 x 3/32
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
5/16 x 5/32
5/16 x 5/32
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
3/4 x 3/8
3/4 x 3/8
3/4 x 1/8
3/4 x 1/8
3/4 x 1/8
3/4 x 1/8
3/4 x 1/8
7/8 x 1/16
7/8 x 1/16
7/8 x 1/16
7/8 x 1/16
1
1
1-1/8
1-3/16
1-1/4
1-3/8
1-7/16
1-1/2
1-9/16
1-5/8
No KS
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/8
5/16 x 5/32
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
MPB Bushings are unsplit.
Bore
Key Seat
Wt.
(*)
F BUSHINGS (continued)
10.8
10.8
10.8
10.7
10.6
10.5
10.4
10.3
10.2
10.2
10.1
10.0
9.9
9.8
9.7
9.6
9.4
9.3
9.2
9.0
8.9
8.8
8.6
8.5
8.5
8.3
8.1
8.0
7.8
7.6
7.5
7.3
7.1
7.2
7.1
6.9
6.7
6.3
6.0
5.8
5.7
5.5
5.2
4.7
F BUSHINGS
FMPB
F1
F118
F1316
F114
F138
F1716
F112
F1916
F158
Product
No.
17.9
17.9
17.7
17.6
17.5
17.2
17.1
16.9
16.8
16.7
F134
F178
F11516
F2
F2116
F218
F2316
F214
F21458KS
F2516
F238
F2716
F212
F2916
F258
F21116
F234
F21316
F278
F21516
F3
F318
F3316
F314
F3516
F338
F3716
F312
F358
F31116
F334
F378
F31516
F4
1-3/4
1-7/8
1-15/16
2
2-1/16
2-1/8
2-3/16
2-1/4
2-1/4
2-5/16
2-3/8
2-7/16
2-1/2
2-9/16
2-5/8
2-11/16
2-3/4
2-13/16
2-7/8
2-15/16
3
3-1/8
3-3/16
3-1/4
3-5/16
3-3/8
3-7/16
3-1/2
3-5/8
3-11/16
3-3/4
3-7/8
3-15/16
4
3/8 x 3/16
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
3/4 x 3/8
3/4 x 3/8
3/4 x 3/8
3/4 x 3/8
3/4 x 3/8
3/4 x 3/8
3/4 x 3/8
7/8 x 3/16
7/8 x 3/16
7/8 x 3/16
7/8 x 3/16
7/8 x 3/16
7/8 x 3/16
7/8 x 3/16
1 x 1/8
1 x 1/8
No KS
16.3
16.0
15.8
15.6
15.4
15.2
15.0
14.8
14.8
14.5
14.3
14.1
13.9
13.7
13.4
13.2
12.9
12.6
12.3
12.1
11.8
11.2
10.9
10.6
11.0
10.6
10.3
10.0
9.4
9.0
8.7
8.1
7.7
6.9
J BUSHINGS
JMPB
J1716
J112
J1916
J11116
J134
J178
J11516
J2
J218
J2316
J214
J2516
J238
J2716
J212
J258
J21116
J234
J278
1-7/16
1-7/16
1-1/2
1-9/16
1-11/16
1-3/4
1-7/8
1-15/16
2
2-1/8
2-3/16
2-1/4
2-5/16
2-3/8
2-7/16
2-1/2
2-5/8
2-11/16
2-3/4
2-7/8
No KS
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
3/8 x 3/16
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
5/8 x 5/16
3/4 x 3/8
28.1
28.1
28.0
27.8
27.4
27.2
26.7
26.5
26.3
25.8
25.6
25.3
25.0
24.7
24.5
24.2
23.6
23.3
23.0
22.2
(Continued—next page)
A1–5
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
SERVICE SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont’d)
PAGE
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
20
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
24
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
26
26
24
31
VMC
SERVICE
SAFETY VALVE (INTERNAL RELIEF)
Removal
Replacement
OIL PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT ASSEMBLY
Disassembly
Reassembly
Adjustment
TRI-MICRO® OIL FILTER
Removal
Replacement
OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal
Replacement
PREPARATION FOR INTERNAL SERVICING
Handhole Cover Removal
Handhole Cover Replacement
CRANKSHAFT SEAL
Oil Seal Leakage
Removal
Installing A New Shaft Seal
CONNECTING RODS AND PISTONS
Disassembly
440 & 450 VMC Compressors Only
450XL VMC Compressor Only
Reassembly
CONNECTING RODS AND PISTONS
Disassembly
440 & 450 VMC Compressors Only
450XL VMC Compressor Only
Reassembly
CYLINDER LINERS
Removal
Lift Rings For Unloading
440 Lift Ring Assembly
450/450XL Lift Ring Assembly
Installation Of Liners
CRANKSHAFT
General
Removal From Drive End
Removal From The Pump End
Servicing The Center Bearing (12 & 16 Cylinders)
Reinstallation
MODIFICATION TO FRONT BEARING RETAINER AND FRONT BEARING COVER
(440 Compressor Only)
CONNECTING ROD NUTS TIGHTENING INSTRUCTIONS VMC COMRPESSORS
-B-
11-01
REPLACES 2-01
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
SERVICE SECTION
ILLUSTRATIONS AND TABLES
PAGE
FIGURE
3
5
6
8
9
11
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
15
8
16
20
21
22
23
24
24
27
36
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
PAGE
TABLE
23
28
29
30
32
1
2
3
4
5
VMC
SERVICE
Bearing And Cylinder Covers Assembly & Disassembly Stud
Upper Cylinder Cross Section
Discharge Diaphragm Valve Placement
Flywheel Removal Tool
Unit Belting Requirements Due To Horsepower
Belt Tension Spring Scale
Typical Capacity Control Mechanism Arrangement – 440 Compressor (Old Style Mushroom
Type)
Typical Capacity Control Mechanism Arrangement – 450 & 450XL Compressor (New Style
Bulletin Type)
Safety Valve Location
Piston Ring Compressing Tool
Front Cover Assembly And Disassembly Tool
Crankshaft Seal Assembly
Piston Ring Dimensions
Cylinder Liner Assembly Tool
Cylinder Liner Removal Tool
Retainer Partial Vertical Cross Section
Typical 400 Series Compressor Vertical Cross Section and Lubricating System
Piston Ring Dimensions And Tolerances
Torque Specifications – VMC Model 440
Torque Specifications – VMC Model 450
Torque Specifications – VMC Model 450XL
Factory Running Dimensions Tolerances, Clearances & Allowable Wear Limits For 440, 450
& 450XL VMC Compressors
-C-
11-01
REPLACES 2-01
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
I.
stop/check valve. After the unit has equalized to suction pressure, depressurize the
unit by using a pump down compressor or
other acceptable means.
GENERAL SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
A. General Comments
When working on the compressor, care must be
taken to ensure contaminants, such as water
from melting ice or snow, dirt, and dust, DO NOT
enter the compressor while it is being serviced. It
is essential that all dust, oil or ice that has accumulated on the outside of the compressor be removed before servicing.
Remove drain plugs from the bearing housings, compressor housing and discharge
manifold. Drain the oil into appropriate containers.
To blow off the gas caught between the discharge valves and discharge stop valve,
close the gauge valve, remove gauge, connect one end of a hose to gauge valve, and
put the other end in a bucket of water. Open
the valve slowly and the water will absorb
any discharged ammonia.
All gaskets, o-rings, roll pins and lock washers
must be replaced when servicing and reassembling the compressor.
As an aid in servicing compressors, a tool kit is
available and can be ordered as Vilter Part No.
KT067. This kit includes necessary wrenches as
well as all the servicing tools pictured in this section.
Connect hose to the suction gauge connection in the same manner, and the water will
absorb the rest of the ammonia. Do not
leave hoses in the water if work has to stop
and the frame is still warm. Cooling of the
frame could siphon water back into the frame
through the hose.
B. Preparation Of Compressor For Servicing
Remove all refrigerant from the compressor before servicing it. To properly evacuate the compressor, employ the following procedure:
1.
Refrigerant 717 (Ammonia) Compressor
Shut down the unit, open the electrical disconnect switch and pull the fuses for the
compressor motor to prevent the unit from
starting. Put a lock on the disconnect switch
and tag the switch to indicate maintenance is
being performed.
Isolate the unit by manually closing the discharge stop/check valve. Close the liquid
supply valves and open all solenoid valves to
prevent liquid refrigerant from being trapped
between the stop valves and solenoid
valves. Allow the unit to equalize to suction
pressure before closing the suction
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
-1-
2.
Halocarbon Refrigerant Compressor
The procedure for removing halocarbon refrigerant from a compressor is NOT the
same as described for an ammonia compressor. To evacuate a compressor using
halocarbon refrigerant, employ certified
technicians to pump down the unit according
to applicable laws and ordinances.
When the unit is pumped down, the temperature of the machine drops. Before opening
the machine, allow it to warm up to room
temperature. Opening the machine before it
is warmed up produces condensation on the
metal surfaces. Moisture is detrimental to
compressor operation. It leads to system
operating difficulties and rusting of parts.
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
3.
Compressor Oil Removal
If service will be performed on unloader solenoids, oil filter change, suction or discharge valves, or crankshaft seal, the oil will
not require removal. If it becomes necessary
to open the crankcase, disconnect power to
the heater and remove oil through the drain
valve.
If a slight positive pressure is allowed to remain in the crankcase before compressor is
opened, it will force the oil from the drain
valve into a container of sufficient capacity.
It is best to have reduced the pressure to 2
psig (13.79 kPa) to minimize the amount of
foaming.
After the compressor has been serviced, do
not reuse this oil. Even reconditioned oil
contains contaminates that could cause
compressor damage.
C. Preparation Of Compressor For Initial
Start After Servicing
Vilter recommends charging 1 to 2 gallons of
fresh oil into the compressor via the oil pressure
gauge port in the front housing. This eliminates
“dry start-up” by forcing oil into the passageways
in the crankshaft, to the connecting rods, and
having a good supply of oil for the shaft seal.
Add oil to crankcase, via drain valve, to within 1/2
of the sight glass in the handhole cover. Connect
power to the crankcase heater, close all open
valves, and check for leaks.
When oil has reached approximately 100°F
(37.8°C), start the compressor and allow it to pull
the load down gradually. Run the compressor for
a few minutes, then stop for a cooling off period.
Restart and run for a longer time. Stop and allow
for a cooling off period again.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
-2-
Lengthen each running period until it is determined no moving parts are heating up excessively.
When the compressor operates with normal running temperatures, allow it to run for whatever
length of time the load requires. With new or replacement compressors, the suction bag should
be removed after running for 24 hours.
II.
CYLINDER COVERS
NOTE:
Before proceeding, refer to Paragraph I, “General
Service Instructions”.
A. Disassembly
To remove the compressor cylinder covers, remove the capacity control lines and water lines
(or liquid cooling lines, if any) from the covers
that will be removed. Next, remove two screws
that are opposite each other diagonally across
the cover (i.e. two screws by water connections).
Install two assembly studs into these holes and
tighten them to thread bottom. Screw on nuts to
within one thread of touching the cover. Remove
the other screws. Slowly back the two nuts off
and make sure the cover follows.
If the cover doesn’t follow, STOP. DO NOT
back off nuts more than one turn. Break the gasket seal and then continue cover removal.
The studs are long enough to relieve all the
spring tension before the nuts are removed.
Remember, the studs must not be turned out with
the nuts. After all of the spring tension is removed, the nuts can be removed, covers lifted off
and head springs removed. It is best to keep all
parts in the correct cylinder assignment. Invert
the cover and place on work surface, placing
each spring in its corresponding location in the
cover.
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
III. SUCTION AND DISCHARGE VALVE PLATES
A. Disassembly (cont’d)
NOTE:
Before proceeding, refer to Paragraph I, “General
Service Instructions”.
A. Disassembly
To service valve plates in the compressor, remove the cylinder covers (refer to paragraph
II.A). In cylinders without unloaders, the valve
assemblies may be removed as soon as the covers are removed.
FIGURE 1.
BEARING AND CYLINDER
COVERS ASSEMBLY & DISASSEMBLY STUD
B. Assembly
Before replacing the cover on the compressor,
inspect the gasket surfaces of the cover and
compressor frame. Remove any debris adhering
to either of these surfaces. Remove any burrs or
rough edges from the mating surfaces to ensure
a tight seal. Replace studs, if removed. Lightly
lubricate both sides of the head gasket. Position
the gasket over the studs and against the compressor frame in the correct orientation. Place
the springs on top of the safety head yokes (rotating the spring until it stays on the yoke). Place
the cover down over the studs and slowly lower
on top of springs. When all pieces are in alignment, place the nuts on the studs and start to
tighten. When the cover is secure within 1¼”
(31.75 mm) of the gasket, install the rest of the
screws so they come in contact with the cover.
This will ensure they will not cross thread in the
holes.
On compressor cylinders equipped with unloaders, the unloader needs to be forced down before
the valves are serviced. If the unloader remains
up, the suction valve is forced off its seat, and will
not seat and locate properly during reassembly.
To hold the unloader mechanism down, remove
the plug from the hole ‘B’ in the frame. Force the
unloader piston down and insert a short 5/16”
(7.93 mm) diameter metal rod through the hole to
restrain the piston. Use a wooden block to force
the piston down to avoid scratching or damaging
the top of the unloader piston. Once the piston is
held down, the valve assemblies can be serviced.
1.
Lift out the safety head yoke, which holds
the safety head assembly in place. When
the yoke is out, lift out the safety head assembly and suction valve plate.
Do not tighten each screw separately, however.
Alternate on opposing screws, until the cover is
seated on the gasket. Remove the studs and
replace with screws. Finish tightening the screws
in an opposing pattern to the recommended
torque values shown in Table 2, 3 or 4 (depending upon your compressor model). Reinstall the
capacity control and head cooling lines, and
check for leaks.
To disassemble the safety head assembly,
remove the locknut on the valve retaining
screw.
1.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
-3-
440 Compressor (Mushroom Style)
(See Figure 7)
440 Compressor (Mushroom Style) (cont’d)
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
Lift off the washer, two diaphragm valves,
spacer and last diaphragm valve. Turn the
safety head assembly over and remove the
valve retaining screw. Remove the helical
suction valve springs from their sockets with
a twisting, pulling motion.
2.
450, 450XL Compressor (Bullet Style)
(See Figure 8)
Lift out the safety head yoke, which holds
the safety head assembly in place. Invert
the yoke to make sure all eight coil springs
are intact within it. If any springs are broken,
locate and remove pieces. Springs can be
removed and replaced without tools. Since
they are only finger tight in the bottom of the
hole, they can be removed with a twisting,
pulling motion.
After the safety yoke has been removed, lift
out the ring plate discharge valve (refer to
note below). Slip the safety head up and off
the roll pin that guides it.
NOTE:
Before removing valve plates, look for the word
“TOP” etched on each plate and ring plate discharge valve. This denotes the unlapped upper
face. If the etching is not clearly visible, dot the
upper face of the valve plate with dye or tape.
Do this sparingly. Any marking applied must be
removed prior to reassembly.
The safety head contains four helical suction
valve springs, which are identical to the eight
discharge valve springs. These need to be
kept separated. The suction valve can be
lifted out.
Before reassembling the safety head assembly, the “top” of the discharge diaphragm
valve must be determined. Place a straight
edge on the diaphragms to reveal the dome.
Diaphragms are installed with the dome on
top. All pieces of the safety head assembly
should be clean and lightly lubricated with
compressor oil before reassembly.
To reassemble the safety head assembly,
insert the valve retaining screw in the safety
head. Place one of the domed discharge
diaphragm valves on the screw, making sure
the dome is up. Next, place the thin spacer
on the screw. Follow it with the two remaining diaphragms, both having the dome on
top. Place the thicker washer and nut on the
valve retaining screw. Tighten the nut to the
torque value listed in Table 2, 3 or 4 (depending upon compressor model).
Place the suction valve springs into the
holes with the end that has two coils wound
towards the bottom of the hole, and twist.
The springs lock in place. When the springs
are properly installed, the safety head can
be inverted without the springs falling out.
Place the suction valve plate in the cavity of
the cylinder liner with the side marked “TOP”
facing up.
Ensure the valve plate rotates freely, without
binding. Replace the safety head assembly
in the frame. Be sure no debris or foreign
material is on any parts. Replace safety
yoke on top of the safety head assembly.
B. Reassembly
1.
440 Compressor (Mushroom Style)
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
-4-
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
11
5A
10
10
5A
99
8
7
6
4 4
5
3
3
2
2
1
Compressor
Frame
KEY
ITEM NO.
1
2
3
4
5
5A
ITEM NAME
Cylinder Liner
Suction Valve Plate
Suction Valve Spring (4)
Safety Head Yoke
Safety Head Spring (4)
Roll Pin (4)
FIGURE 2.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
ITEM NO.
6*
7*
8*
9*
10 *
11 *
ITEM NAME
Valve Retaining Screw
Hexagon Lock Nut
Valve Washer
Valve Spacer
Diaphragm Discharge Valves (3)
Safety Head
UPPER CYLINDER CROSS SECTION
-5-
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
FIGURE 3.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
DISCHARGE DIAPHRAGM VALVE PLACEMENT
-6-
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
1.
440 Compressor (Mushroom Style) (cont’d)
All replacement parts are drilled. They are
interchangeable with original parts. All replacement cylinder line kits have roll pins.
Discard roll pins if new liner is being used
with old safety head and safety head yoke.
The old style frames have built-in guide lugs
which serve the same purpose as the roll
pins. Replace safety springs and cylinder
covers on the compressor.
NOTE:
Compressors with serial numbers 7000 and
higher have 4 holes drilled through the safety
head and safety head yoke into the cylinder liner,
to accommodate roll pins.
Place the suction valve into its cavity in the
cylinder liner with the “top” facing up. The
valve plate should rotate freely without binding. Replace the safety head assembly in
the frame.
IV. COMPRESSOR DRIVE TYPES
NOTE:
Before proceeding, refer to Paragraph I, “General
Service Instructions”.
A. V-Belt Drive Compressors
1.
Remove belt guard.
After replacing the cylinder cover, return the
unloader mechanism to its operating position
by removing the metal rod from the hole in
the frame. This allows the piston to rise.
Put the plug back into the hole (hole ‘B’) in
the frame and reconnect the unloader lines.
2.
Loosen motor rail clamps. Remove tension
on belts to provide enough slack to allow the
belts to be removed from the drive without
having to pry or roll the belts off.
If belts are to be reused, mark the belts to
orientation on the drive. The belts can now
be removed.
450, 450XL Compressor (Bullet Style)
Before assembling the valves, safety head
and yoke, use a solvent to remove any dye,
paint or tape you may have used as a
marker.
Put the suction valve into their holes with the
end that has two coils closely wound towards the bottom of the hole and twist with
the top of the finger. This will lock the spring
in its hole. The springs are properly installed
when the safety head can be inverted without the springs falling out. Springs of all the
same “hand” are used (wound the same
way). This allows the valve to rotate during
operation. When the valve rotates, the action tends to “heal” any small nicks or
scratches on the valve or seal, and clean
away any foreign material or dirt which may
lodge between the valve and seat. This will
also spread out the plate wear from the
springs.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
-7-
Belt Removal
2.
Flywheel Removal
Remove flywheel screw holding the flywheel
on the shaft.
Install flywheel puller on the flywheel. An alternate tool can be fabricated from a 4½”
(107.95 mm) diameter steel plate, ½” (12.7
mm) thick with three equally spaced 11/16”
(17.46 mm) holes on a 3½” (82.55 mm) or
37/8” (98.43 mm) bolt circuit. See Figure 4.
Also needed are several 1¾” (44.45 mm)
plate washers and three 5/8” (15.88 mm) x
1¾” (44.45 mm) long screws. Place several
washers against the end of the shaft so they
extend past the flywheel hub.
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
2.
Flywheel Removal (cont’d)
Screw the plate to the flywheel and tighten
the screws so the plate pulls tight against the
washers. Tighten the screws evenly so they
pull the flywheel. Apply pressure until the
flywheel breaks free.
The drive keys should fit tightly in their respective grooves and be free of damage.
The keyways should also be free of chips
and burrs that would not allow full contact of
the key to the keyway.
2” Dia.
FIGURE 4.
3.
FLYWHEEL REMOVAL TOOL
Sheave Removal
Specific instructions for motor sheave maintenance are located after the Operation Section of this manual. These should be consulted for specific maintenance instructions.
4.
Drive Inspection
Inspect the motor and compressor shafts,
sheave bushing and flywheel for fretting corrosion or other wear. Fretting corrosion is
the result of two5” metallic
surfaces (a shaft
Dia.
and flywheel or bushing bore) having movement relative to one another. This is usually
due to the incorrect tightening of drive components, use of oil or other anti-seize compounds, worn components, burrs or other
imperfections not allowing the flywheel and
crankshaft to mate properly.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
Signs of fretting corrosion are reddish brown
powdery oxidation and wearing away of the
surface of the shafts or drive component
shaft bores. Minor fretting corrosion may be
eliminated through light sanding after which
the adequate contact area between the
crankshaft and flywheel must be assured to
prevent further fretting. Heavy fretting corrosion will require repair or replacement of the
motor shaft or replacement of the compressor crankshaft and drive components. The
flywheel or crankshaft should not be rematched to eliminate the results of the fretting corrosion, as adequate clearances cannot be assured after remachining.
-8-
The flywheel and sheave should be inspected for abnormal wear and damage. A
groove wear gauge should be used to check
condition of the sidewalls and width of the
groove. Excessive wear is not permitted as
this will lead to problems in achieving correct
belt tension and loading, contributing to excessive belt and sheave wear.
Clean any foreign matter that has accumulated in the grooves.
The sheave and pulley should be inspected
for cracks and other damage that could affect the integrity of the drive components.
The sheave and pulley should be inspected
for excessive run-out, indicating bent components. Bent pulleys or sheaves will wear
the groove sidewalls unevenly, as the belt
changes its angle of engagement as the pulley turns.
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
456XL Booster
FIGURE 5.
4.
458XL High Stage
UNIT BELTING REQUIREMENTS DUE TO HORSEPOWER
Drive Inspection (cont’d)
also be inspected for sharp bends and kinks
while they are slack as this indicates internal
damage due to incorrect installation techniques. The belts can be cleaned at this
time. Only soap and water should be used
to clean the belts and other components.
Belt dressing should never be used on drive
components, as it will attack the elastomer
used in construction of the belts.
The groove bottom should also be checked
for polishing, as this indicates the belt is not
riding correctly in the groove. What has
happened is the belt or groove has worn to
the point the belt is actually rubbing on the
bottom of the groove.
This effectively
changes the pitch diameter of the sheave or
pulley for that groove, causing the belt to
operate at a different speed than the rest.
This will result in excessive heat and wear to
the drive components.
When drive components are replaced, it is
necessary to replace them with identical
components. Due to operating conditions
and the horsepower requirements of the
compressors, the number of belts on a compressor package can vary from 2 through 10
belts and not all flywheel grooves will be
filled.
Belts should always be changed in sets to
minimize length variations between used and
new belts. Note the match numbers on the
belts. The same number must be on all belts
in the set.
5.
Drive Installation
If installation is new and the belts are being
installed for the first time, the following items
must be taken care of before the belts can
be installed.
Drive belts should be inspected for abrasion,
tearing, separation or checking that would
indicate possible damage to drive components or alignment problems. They should
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
-9-
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
5.
Drive Installation (cont’d)
assembly. As the anti-seize is trapped when
the parts are tightened, it will create a sliding
layer between the parts. The parts are not
free to move independent of each other
while the unit is in operation, creating fretting
corrosion. This results in excessive wear of
the drive components and the possibility of
the parts welding themselves together.
The compressor, motor and base should be
level. This will help speed the alignment
process of the unit if the shafts are level and
in the same plane before starting the alignment process.
All piping must be finished and properly supported. Any piping stress must not be permitted to act on the compressor frame. The
base must be secured to the floor and
grouted.
The belts can now be installed. The motor
should be moved towards the compressor to
facilitate the installation of the belts.
The belt closest to the compressor should be
installed first. The belts should not be rolled
or pried when installing them, as this will
damage the cords in the belts and cause a
failure in a short time.
The compressor should be checked for a
soft foot and shimmed accordingly. Elimination of a soft foot in a belt drive compressor
is essential to reduce vibration and misalignment problems.
6.
The sheave and pulley should be checked
for paint and foreign matter in the grooves.
Any foreign material will cause a decrease in
the horsepower transmitting ability of the
belts and lead to accelerated wear of the
belts, pulley and sheave.
If this is an existing installation, the motor
and compressor shafts should be checked to
see if they are level and in the same plane
before starting the alignment process. If the
compressor has been moved or if there is a
complaint of excessive vibration, the compressor should be checked for a soft foot.
Absolutely no lubricants or anti-seize compounds should be used in the installation of
the motor sheave and bushing, or the crankshaft and flywheel. The bushing as supplied
by the manufacturer should not have any lubricant applied to it or the sheave bore. The
applied lubricant will be trapped between
mating surfaces of the sheave and bushing,
or bushing and shaft. When the components
are tightened, the resulting hydraulic pressure of the lubricant trapped between the
mating surfaces will result in a cracked
sheave or bushing. Lubricant or anti-seize is
usually applied to the shaft for ease of dis400 Series VMC
SERVICE
- 10 -
Drive Alignment
There are 3 different types of misalignment
that are possible, more than one of which
may be present at any one time. These are:
ƒ Horizontal angular
ƒ Vertical angular
ƒ Parallel
Although V-belt drives are somewhat tolerant
to misalignment, the maximum amount of
misalignment permitted is 1/16 of an inch per
12” of shaft, center to center distance. If this
is exceeded, excessive drive, belt and bearing wear will result.
Horizontal angular misalignment results
when the motor and compressor shafts are
in the same horizontal plane, but not in the
same vertical plane. A straight edge is held
against the compressor pulley face. The distance from the straight edge to the motor
sheave sides is compared. They should be
the same. If they are not the same, adjust
the motor to bring the sheave and pulley into
alignment.
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
6.
amount of deflection should be 19/64” (7.54
mm) and the tension required to achieve it
should be between 12 to 18 lbs.
Drive Alignment (cont’d)
Vertical angular misalignment results when
the motor and compressor shafts are in the
same vertical plane, but not in the same
horizontal plane. A straight edge is held
against the compressor pulley face. The
distance from the straight edge to the motor
sheave at the top and bottom is compared.
They should be the same. If the back of the
motor is sitting low, the top of the sheave
will be back further than the bottom of the
sheave. The motor must be shimmed so
the top and bottom of the sheave are in the
same plane as the compressor pulley.
FIGURE 6.
The belt tension spring scale is placed in
the center of the belt span. The scale is
then pushed down until the proper deflection is reached. The tension should then be
read and recorded. The process is then repeated for the remaining belts.
The last check is the parallel alignment.
This check aligns the belt grooves of the
pulley and sheave. The measurement is
taken from a straight edge held at the outer
rim to the edge of the first groove used on
the compressor pulley (usually not all
grooves are filled due to horsepower requirements). This is then compared to a
measurement taken from the straight edge
to the corresponding groove on the sheave.
The sheave position is then adjusted to assure the sheave is in line with the flywheel.
7.
8.
If the tension is too low, the belts should be
tightened evenly and rechecked.
The tension between belts should be within
±1 lbs. of each other. Inconsistent measurements indicate problems with alignment,
belt length and/or wear of the drive components. The problem should be corrected
before the unit is returned to service.
Belt Tension
Proper tension is essential to long belt life.
An improperly tensioned belt will result in inefficient operation and excessive heat. The
ideal tension is the least amount of tension
at which the belt will not slip under the load.
9.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
- 11 -
Banded 5V, V-belts
Due to their design, banded V-belts require
special tensioning techniques in order to set
the tension properly. There are two methods
to check the tension of banded belts. They
are as follows:
Single 5V, V-belts
One device that provides the most accurate
way of measuring the tension of the drive
belts is a belt tension spring scale (Vilter
Part No. 3072A). See Figure 6. This device
measures the amount of force needed to deflect the belt a given amount. The range of
the readings should be between 12 to 18 lbs.
The deflection should be 1/64” per inch of
span. If the span of the belts from the
sheave to the flywheel is 38 inches, the
BELT TENSION SPRING SCALE
The first method utilizes a tension tester to
measure the deflection. The number of belt
bands in the belt is multiplied by the deflection force of 12 to 18 lbs. A board or metal
plate is then placed across the bands to
equalize the force as the tension tester is
depressed on the board or plate.
9.
Banded 5V, V-belts (cont’d)
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
A straight edge is positioned across the
sheave and flywheel to use as a reference to
measure the deflection of the belts.
Inspect the compressor coupling bore and
crankshaft to make sure they are clean and
free of burrs. Apply anti-seize to shaft and
coupling bore. Place the key on the shaft
and slip on the coupling. Install the bolt (and
washer, if required), and tighten.
The second method measures the amount of
stretch as the belts are tightened to determine the tension of the belts. The banded
belts are installed on the drive and rotated to
get all the slack on the bottom side. The
belts are then tightened to remove the slack
from the belts. Measure the outside circumference to the nearest ¼” (6.35 mm). Multiply this reading by ¾% (0.0075) to 1%
(0.01). Add this to the circumference reading. Elongate the belt to the new length.
EXAMPLE: 80” x 1% = 0.8” + 80” = 80.8”
Reassemble shim pack and center member
in correct orientation. Tighten bolts and note
distance between hubs per coupling manufacturer’s bulletin. This bulletin is located in
the Installation Section.
Recheck alignment, if necessary.
V.
CAPACITY CONTROL
B. Direct Drive Compressors
A. Old Style (Mushroom Type)
1.
1.
Coupling Removal
Remove the guard. Remove the bolts that
extend through the coupling and remove the
center member. Remove the bolts that hold
the shim packs to coupling, and make note
of location of the washers. Using one or two
of these bolts through the shim pack will
keep the shims in alignment.
To remove the coupling from the crankshaft,
remove the screw (and washer, if present).
Try to lightly tap the coupling off the shaft, or
apply heat to coupling. A puller can be constructed out of a flat steel bar with holes that
match two holes in the coupling in a straight
line past the center of the crankshaft. Make
a hole in the center of the bar for a 5/8”
(15.88 mm) bolt, thread the hole or weld a
5
/8” (15.88 mm) nut inline with the hole. Bolt
this bar loosely to holes in coupling. Place a
solid washer or disc (a little smaller than end
of the shaft) between the bar and in front of
the tapped hole in the crankshaft. Using a
5
/8” (15.88 mm) bolt, apply force to center
crankshaft and a pulling force on the coupling.
2.
Lift Pins, Ring and Springs Removal
The valve lifting mechanism consists of the
lift pins, lift ring and lift springs all assembled
to the cylinder liner. To remove these parts
from the cylinder liner, place the liner on a
flat surface in an upright position. Rotate the
lift ring slightly until the four semi-circular
notches line up with the lift pins, and slide
the ring down off the liner. Lift the pins out
of the top of the liner.
In order to put the unloading mechanism
onto the cylinder liner, set the lift ring on a
flat surface with the guides for the lift springs
facing up. Next place the cylinder liner inside the lift ring. Drop the four lift pins into
their holes in the liner with the notched ends
of the pins facing down and the flat side facing out. Lift the rings so the semicircular
notches slide over the pins. Then, rotate the
lift ring so the springs fit into their holes in
the cylinder liner.
Coupling Replacement
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
- 12 -
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
Use this illustration for:
Oil Actuated Unloading
•
High Stage
•
Booster
•
Both Stages of 2-Stage
Gas Actuated Unloading
•
High Stage
•
High Stage of 2-Stage
FIGURE 7.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
*
Yoke assembly is bolted down on one end as
shown on the two cylinder and two-stage compressor capacity control mechanism. All other
compressors do not use these bolts.
TYPICAL CAPACITY CONTROL MECHANISM ARRANGEMENT –
440 COMPRESSOR (OLD STYLE MUSHROOM TYPE)
- 13 -
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
2.
the rear of the lifting rod. This keeps the
yoke depressed for easier handling. Place
the yoke into the frame through the cylinder
opening and position it so the slot on the
yoke lifting arm registers with the flats on the
long pivot pin. Depress the piston with a
block of wood, and remove the rod or piece
of wood used to hold the yoke assembly depressed. Then, center the assembly between the two cylinder liner holes.
Actuator Mechanism Removal
The first step of removing capacity control
actuator from the machine is to push the
unloader piston down with a block of wood.
This holds the assembly depressed and
makes handling much easier.
Push the assembly away from the unloader
piston until the notch in the yoke lifting arm
slides free of the flats on the long pivot pin.
Then, remove the mechanism through the
liner hole in the top of the frame. Remove
the long pivot pin from the shaft of the piston. Now slide the piston out of the cylinder
and slip the ring or rings off the piston, taking
care not to break any.
B. New Style (Bullet Type)
1.
In order to put the unloading mechanism
back in the cylinder liner, place the lift pins
with the springs around them in their holes.
Place the lift ring on the pins with the smaller
inside diameter facing top of the liner so it
will slip over and cover the retainer when it is
in place. Placing the liner on its side and
holding the lift ring back against the pins and
springs, slide the ring retainer over the liner
into its groove.
NOTE:
Gas actuated unloader pistons have two grooves
and use four metal piston pins. Oil actuated
unloader pistons have one groove and use a
rubber piston ring (o-ring).
3.
Actuator Mechanism Replacement
Gas actuated unloader piston:
Clean the piston thoroughly and place four
steel rings in each groove. Work the rings in
carefully. Avoid breaking them. Place the
piston in the cylinder and compress the rings
to work them into the cylinder.
Oil actuated unloader piston:
Clean the piston thoroughly and place the oring on it. Work the o-ring on carefully to
avoid breaking or excessively stretching it.
Liberally coat piston and o-ring, as well as
cylinder bore, with compressor oil. Place the
piston in the cylinder and compress the oring to work it into the cylinder.
Lift Pins, Ring and Springs Removal
2.
Unloader Piston Removal
It is not necessary to remove or disturb the
actuator mechanism or the cylinder liners to
remove the unloader piston. There are two
holes in the top of the unloader piston. One
is threaded, the other is not. Use ¼”-20NC
eyebolt in the center hole. Use the other
hole to keep the piston from turning in the
hole in the frame while doing this. Using the
eyebolt as a handle, pull the piston out of its
hole in the frame.
Next, insert the long pivot pin into its hole in
the piston shaft and position it so the flats
will receive the slot of the yoke lifting arm.
The end of the pin is machined flat so the installer can see the position of the inner flat.
Compress the yoke assembly and place a
piece of 5/16” (23.81 mm) o.d. steel rod under
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
- 14 -
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
** COMPRESSOR APPLICATION NOTE
Gas Actuated Unloading is standard on:
•
High Stage, except 100% internal CR
Oil Actuated Unloading is standard on:
•
High Stage with 100% internal CR
•
Booster
•
Both Stages of integral 2-Stage
**
Yoke assembly is bolted down on one end, as
shown, on all compressor banks equipped with
optional single cylinder unloading. All other
compressors do not use these bolts.
FIGURE 8. TYPICAL CAPACITY CONTROL MECHANISM ARRANGEMENT –
450 & 450XL COMPRESSORS (NEW STYLE BULLET TYPE)
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
- 15 -
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
3.
center the mechanism between the two cylinder liner holes.
Unloader Piston Replacement
Before reinstalling piston, remove old ring
set. Clean and inspect for wear. Replace
piston if wear is excessive. a ring set consisting of “PTFE” outer ring and a silicone
rubber inner ring is used on the piston. Replace ring set carefully with a new one every
time a piston is removed. With eyebolt removed, place the piston into its hole in the
frame. Compress the rings with the fingers
and work them into the hole carefully so they
are not nicked or cut as the piston is moved
down. Push the piston down until it touches
the yoke lifting arm.
4.
A. Removal
If, for any reason, the safety valve has relieved,
install a new valve. Make no attempt to adjust
the relief valve. To replace the safety valve, remove the cover on the top of the compressor
frame marked “safety valve” by taking out the two
screws which hold it in place. Then, remove the
safety valve by using a standard 1¾” (44.45 mm)
socket.
Actuator Mechanism Removal
Before a capacity control actuator mechanism can be removed from the compressor,
at least one of its corresponding cylinder liners must be removed. The first step in removing capacity control actuator from the
machine is to push the unloader piston down
with a block of wood. Then take a piece of
steel (5/16” in diameter) or a piece of wood,
and insert it between the two vertical rods on
the yoke assembly accommodating the short
pivot pin and fulcrum pin. This will hold the
assembly depressed and make handling
much easier. Then remove the unloader piston as detailed above. The mechanism can
then be removed through the cylinder liner
hole in the frame.
5.
VI. SAFETY VALVE (INTERNAL RELIEF)
FIGURE 9.
Actuator Mechanism Replacement
Compress the yoke assembly and place a
small piece of wood or a 5/16” (7.94 mm) o.d.
steel rod between the two vertical rods mentioned in paragraph 4. This keeps the yoke
depressed for easier handling. Then place
the mechanism into the frame through the
cylinder liner opening and position it. Install
unloader piston as detailed above. Depress
the unloader piston with a block of wood and
remove the rod or piece of wood used to
hold the yoke assembly depressed. Then
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
Note: Safety Valve is set at a differential pressure of 300
PSIG (2069 kPa). Maximum discharge temperature is
300°F (150°C).
- 16 -
SAFETY VALVE LOCATION
B. Replacement
Lightly oil the threads of the valve and screw the
valve into place. Lightly oil a new gasket and
place it on the frame. Position the cover and
tighten it down.
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
VII. OIL PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT ASSEMBLY
A. Disassembly
The oil pressure adjustment assembly is located
in the front bearing housing. It consists of a
spring loaded ball positioned in a machined seat
in the top of the front bearing housing. An adjusting screw turned in and out changes the amount
of oil bypass, thus changing the oil pressure.
Remove the cap. A packing tool is required to
remove the gland nut (Vilter Part No. A33781A).
After the gland nut has been removed, use a
large screwdriver to turn the stem counterclockwise and remove it completely. The packing with
2 washers should also come out. Using a pencil
magnet, pull out the spring and steel ball.
B. Reassembly
Clean the steel ball and place in the hole. Place
the stainless steel spring on top of it. Screw the
adjustment stem in the hole to get threads
started. Place a washer over the end, then packing, then the other washer. The adjustment stem
may have to be turned in so the packing nut can
be installed and tightened. Adjustments of the oil
pressure will have to be reset after start up. Replace the cap and gasket afterwards.
C. Adjustment
To provide quick response of the compressor
unloader mechanism, it is recommended the oil
pressure relief valve be set to maintain 40 psi
(275.79 kPa) net oil pressure. Net oil pressure
should be held at 35 psi (241.32 kPa) and 40 psi
(275.79 kPa). Net oil pressure is calculated by
subtracting the compressor suction pressure
from the oil pressure gauge reading while the
compressor is running.
NOTE:
Before proceeding, refer to Paragraph I, “General
Service Instructions”.
A. Removal
To remove the oil filter, drain the tank by removing the pipe plug on the bottom or side. Next remove one of the front screws. It can then be
threaded back in at least 2 turns, or a ¼” (6.35
mm) longer screw can be used and also
threaded in 2 turns. This will be the pivot point or
hinge to swing the filter and tank out for ease of
removal. By unscrewing the remaining 3 screws
alternately, the tank will start to lower until the
first screw installed comes in contact with the filter adapter. Force the center tube top plate
down and out of its connection hole while pivoting the filter tank. Now that the filter and center
tube can be removed, disassemble the center
tube by removing the bottom spring plate. Slide
the old filter off and discard properly. The tube
should be washed off and clean.
B. Replacement
Make sure to remove the used gasket of the filter
adapter and install a new one. After cleaning the
tank, reinstall the pipe plug in the drain. Install it
on its pivot screw. Add fresh oil to fill half the
tank. Reassemble the new filter on the center
tube. Slowly place the filter in the tank and allow
the filter to absorb the new oil. Pivot the tank under the adapter and align the center tube in its
hole. Start the remaining 3 screws than tighten
the tank flange to the adapter. The proper
placement of the mechanism, once in the frame,
is having the curved sides of the bottom plate on
the mechanism aligned between the lower liner
bores.
VIII. TRI-MICRO OIL FILTER
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
- 17 -
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
IX. OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY
X.
NOTE:
Before proceeding, refer to Paragraph I, “General
Service Instructions”.
PREPARATION FOR INTERNAL SERVICING
NOTE:
Before proceeding, refer to Paragraph I, “General
Service Instructions”.
A. Removal
A. Handhole Cover Removal
To remove the oil pump assembly, first remove
the filter tank and adapter from the rear housing.
Be prepared for a small amount of oil to drain
from adapter. The pump will be exposed in the
center and the outer pump housing will be covered by a gasket. Remove gasket. At the top
right and bottom left, you will find tapped holes to
aid in removing the pump, if necessary. The
pump housing is approximately 1½” (38.1 mm)
thick, so it requires jack screws 2” (50.8 mm) or
longer to release the inner gasket. Once loose,
pull the oil pump straight back.
The oil pump is a factory built and tested component. It is furnished as a complete assembly only
and cannot be serviced in the field.
B. Replacement
To replace the oil pump assembly, first rotate the
crankshaft so the drive key is hanging from one
of four screws through the rear bearing retainer.
Make sure the small orifice plug in the rear housing (at the 12 o’clock position) is clear. Clean all
gasket surfaces. Install gasket (Vilter Part No.
31899A), correctly aligning oil passage holes.
Align pump shaft flats to match flats in pump
drive key. The locating dowel pin in the rear
housing should align with hole in the pump housing to the top-left-center.
Install the pump and seat it against the inner
gasket. The outer surface of the pump should
now be recessed approximately 1/8” (3.175 mm)
to the rear bearing housing. Install gasket (Vilter
Part No. 31900A), correctly aligning the holes.
The slot in this gasket should be at the 9 o’clock
position. Place the rubber seal gasket on the
filter adapter, and reattach the filter assembly
onto the rear housing. Install screws and tighten
down evenly.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
- 18 -
To work internally on the compressor, the handhole cover and crankcase oil will have to be removed to gain access. The heater will have to
be electrically disconnected at this time. Remember to shut the power off and lock it out.
After disconnecting the wiring, loosen all but two
screws on the upper corners of the cover. This
helps support the cover during removal and prevents damaging the heater. If the cover sticks to
the frame, a slight tap with a lead or soft face
hammer will free it.
Holding the cover in place, remove the two remaining screws, and pull the cover straight back
away from the frame. Remove any gasket material from the cover and frame face. Also inspect
and remove any burrs or rough edges from the
mating surfaces to ensure a tight seal at time of
reassembly.
B. Handhole Cover Replacement
Lightly lubricate both sides of a new gasket with
refrigerant oil or general purpose grease. Place
the gasket on the cover, and guiding in the
heater, place the cover against the frame opening. While holding the cover and making sure the
gasket is still in place, insert two screws in the
lower row to help support the cover and keep the
gasket from slipping out. Start the rest of the
screws in their holes and continue to check gasket placement. Tighten screws evenly to the
torque requirements in Table 2, 3 or 4 (depending upon compressor model). Connect the
B. Handhole Cover Replacement (cont’d)
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
heater wiring and heater cover, add oil to crankcase and turn on power to the heater to preheat
the oil for operation of compressor.
XI. CRANKSHAFT SEAL
NOTE:
Before proceeding, refer to Paragraph I, “General
Service Instructions”.
A. Oil Seal Leakage
In refrigeration compressors, a slight amount of
oil leakage past the crankshaft seal is normal and
desirable. A few drops per minute is reasonable.
This leakage performs two important functions. It
helps lubricate the neoprene bellows and o-rings,
and it helps cool mating rotating parts to provide
less wear and longer life. A receptacle for collection is recommended.
B. Removal
The flywheel or coupling will have to be removed.
Detach the tubing line on the bottom of the front
housing. Oil will drain from the seal chamber, be
prepared to collect it. After the oil has drained,
remove the 8 screws holding the cover. When
removing the cover, caution should be taken because the front carbon seal might come off with
the cover. At this time, if the seal is going to be
reused, clean the surface of the shaft and avoid
getting anything in the housing area.
Grab the front rubber bellows and pull forward. It
should release. If not, pry by the tabs on the
metal ring (alternating force from side to side) to
remove it. Remove the large spring.
Next step is to remove the 3 screws in the retainer that hold the inner mirror seat. Put 2 of
these screws in the tapped holes of the retainer.
Rotate the retainer so screws are at 3 and 9
o’clock positions. Pull on the screws to aid in
removing the retainer and the rest of the seal assembly. Clean out the seal chamber with suitable refrigeration parts cleaner. Afterwards, coat
the area and crankshaft to keep them from rusting.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
- 19 -
C. Installing A New Shaft Seal
Remove the mirror seats from the inner retainer
and outer cover. The mirror face can be removed by tapping on back side that is exposed in
each part. Make sure these parts are then
cleaned. Place either on a flat surface with the
recess up. Oil the o-ring sealing area. Take the
mirror face (do not touch the mirrored surface),
oil outer o-ring and lay it in the cover or retainer
with the mirror face upward. Using a very clean
cloth or similar item, cover mirror face and, using
palm of hand, set it in the recess. Repeat this
assembly process for the other mirror face.
Vilter recommends that if any part of a seal
needs replacement, the entire shaft seal should
be replaced with a new one.
Make sure the oil passage in the shaft is unobstructed. Install the inner retainer with mirror
face, flush in front housing, with the word “TOP”
at the top. Tighten down evenly with the 3
screws.
The shaft seal assembly is symmetrical. It can
be installed in either direction. Spray oil on inner
mirror face. Liberally coat oil on one of the bellows and carbon assemblies. Avoid coming in
contact with carbon. Carefully slip the assembly
on the shaft until the carbon touches the mirror
face. Put the spring over the shaft and seal on
the bellows assembly, and slide it onto the shaft
to join up with the spring. With the new cover
gasket in place, install the cover over the end of
the shaft.
Push the cover all the way on, lining up the bolt
holes so the drain is to the bottom. Tighten down
the 8 screws evenly to the torque requirements in
Table 2, 3 or 4 (depending upon compressor
model).
XII. CONNECTING RODS AND PISTONS
NOTE:
Before proceeding, refer to Paragraph I, “General
Service Instructions”.
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
2.
A. Disassembly
After the cylinder covers, valves and handhole
cover have been removed, the first step in removing the piston and rod assembly is to remove
the Palnut® locknuts on the rod bearing bolts.
Then, remove the plain nuts and slide the bearing cap off of the nuts. The Palnut locknut is not
used with this type of locknut.
Handle the bearing cap carefully to avoid damage to the bearing half insert. Push the rod and
piston out through the top of the cylinder. Avoid
possible mixing with components. Keep all parts
together in relation to their position in the compressor. Connecting rods and rod caps are
match marked to aid in reassembly. On reassembly, all parts must be installed in the same
position in the compressor.
450XL VMC Compressor Only
If the piston rings are to be removed, wrap a
piece of thin shim stock around the piston.
Work the rings carefully out of their grooves
and onto the shim stock. They can then be
worked down over the piston. Caution must
be exercised to prevent breaking the rings.
The piston and connecting rod assembly
should not be disassembled further. It is
furnished only as a complete assembly and
should not be worked on in the field.
B. Reassembly
All new compressors use three compression
rings and one oil control ring. When replacing
rings, use the ring expander. Check the grooves
to make sure they are clean.
As soon as the parts are removed from the compressor, they should be thoroughly cleaned with
a suitable refrigeration parts cleaner. Once the
oil film is removed, the bare metal is subject to
rust. This reaction can start immediately. Therefore, lubricate the surfaces of the parts lightly
with clean compressor oil immediately after
cleaning.
The tabs on the bearing half insert fit into the recess in the rod and rod cap, and the inserts can
be slipped out without difficulty. To replace the
rod bearings, it is necessary to change the inserts only and not the entire rod.
1.
FIGURE 10.
PISTON RING COMPRESSING
TOOL
440 & 450 VMC Compressors Only
To remove the rod from the piston, take out
the piston pins. Remove the spring locks
from the pin hole on each side of the piston
and slide out the pins. If this cannot be accomplished by hand, it may be necessary to
force the pin out with a brass rod and hammer. Be careful not to damage spring lock
grooves. To remove the piston rings, use
the ring expander. Caution should be exercised to prevent the rings from scoring the
piston.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
- 20 -
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
B. Reassembly (cont’d)
The easiest way to replace the rings on the piston is to wrap a thin piece of shim stock around
the pistons and slide the ring over this. Do not
force the rings when sliding them onto the shim
stock. The rings are brittle and may snap. A tool
is also available to aid in the installation of the
rings.
Both compression and oil rings are marked to
indicate the top of the ring. Install the compression rings with the identifying mark to the top of
the pistons. Rotate the end gaps on each ring so
they are not aligned on the piston.
Remove the piston assembly. Check the fit of
the piston pin bushing for wear. The 440 and
450 have a different pin and piston design from
the 450XL compressor. The 440 and 450 piston
and piston pin bushing have a “slip” fit. When
replacing the piston and bushing, the bushing
must be reamed to the correct “slip” fit after installation into the rod to accommodate the new
piston pin. The 450XL piston and piston pin
bushing cannot be changed in the field due to
tolerances. They must be purchased as a unit
with the connecting rod and piston assembly.
The piston pin should not slip easily into its hole,
but it must not be driven down. It may be necessary, however, to tap the pin lightly with a block
of wood and a hammer. Be sure the hole in the
rod pin bushing is aligned so the pin can slip
through it. When the pin has been tapped in far
enough, install the two piston pin lock rings, one
at each end of the piston pin.
Two styles of bearing half inserts have been
used in the compressor. One style has only the
hole in the rod half to allow oil to travel up the
rod. The second type has annular grooves to
allow a continuous supply of oil.
The bearing inserts should never be spread
open, by hand or any other means, to provide
for a tighter fit in the rod.
If an inspection indicates the rod bearing surfaces are worn, replace the bearing insert. Assemble bearing inserts by pressing them into
place, making sure the notch in the rod is clear.
If the bearing insert does not properly fit in the
rod and it falls out during assembly, either the
bearing insert or the rod is worn or incorrectly
made.
When installing the bearing insert into the connecting rod, make sure there is no oil on the connecting rod or the back side of the bearing insert.
If the original bearings have failed, check the
crankshaft bearing surface. If there are slight
imperfections due to bearing failure, remove by
polishing with fine crocus cloth. Then, clean the
bearing surface with suitable refrigeration cleaner
and lubricate with clean compressor oil.
Lubricate the inside of the cylinder and the entire
piston. The recommended method of installing
the piston in the liner is with the use of a Piston
Ring Compressor. See Figure 10.
Attach the oil line to the bottom of the front housing. Do not over tighten the nut. Rotate the shaft
a few times to help the seal settle into position.
FIGURE 11.
FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY AND
DISASSEMBLY STUD
CAUTION
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
- 21 -
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
FIGURE 12.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
CRANKSHAFT SEAL ASSEMBLY
- 22 -
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
B. Reassembly (cont’d)
Connecting rod bolts are secured with one plain
steel nut and one spring steel locknut (commonly
referred to as a “Palnut”). The plain nut tightening torque should be listed in Table 2, 3 or 4 (depending upon compressor model). The torque
wrenches should be set to the high side of the
tightening torque range.
As the rods, bearing inserts and crank pins are
all machine to fine tolerances, no further adjustments are necessary.
locking feature is lost and a loose rod connection
may result. After each rod is installed, rotate the
crankshaft by hand to make sure everything is
free and there is no binding of the rotating parts.
CAUTION
Late model VMC compressors may push liners out.
XIII. CYLINDER LINERS
NOTE:
Before proceeding, refer to Paragraph I, “General
Service Instructions”.
A. Removal
FIGURE 13.
PISTON RING DIMENSIONS
TABLE 1. PISTON RING DIMENSIONS AND
TOLERANCES
DIMENSION
COMPRESSION
OIL RING
RING
A
4.500
4.500
B
0.160 to 0.170
0.170 to 0.180
C
0.1230 to 0.1240
0.1860 to 0.1870
D
0.013 to 0.0225
0.013 to 0.023
E
0.002 to 0.004
0.0015 to 0.004
After a plain nut has been placed on a rod bolt
and torqued to the specified value, turn a Palnut
to the rod bolt with the open end of the hexagon
pointing away from the plain nut. The Palnut
should be turned until mating parts are pulled
together and actual tightening begins.
Final tightening and locking is then achieved by
giving the Palnut an additional 1/3 to 1/2 (maximum) turn. Although the plain steel nuts may be
reused, new unused Palnuts must be used each
time the connecting rods are reassembled to the
crankshaft. If used Palnuts are installed, their
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
- 23 -
Once the piston and rod assemblies are removed, the liner can be extracted from the frame
by means of a Vilter Liner Pulling Tool (KT 257).
This tool, or similar, is required for all 440/450
compressors and 2-stage compressors.
NOTE:
If the cylinder bank has unloading, the unloader
piston needs to be held down for ease in liner
removal.
The liners in the 450XL compressor have a
looser fit into the frame. They can be removed
by pulling from the bottom of the liner by hand.
NOTE:
2-Stage liners have an extra groove without ring
that seals the suction chamber from the crankcase.
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
B. Installation Of Liners
B. Lift Rings For Unloading
There are two styles of unloading lift ring assemblies.
1.
440 Lift Ring Assembly
Rotate the lift to align the notches with the
pins. The springs will follow. The lift ring will
then drop to the bottom of the liner.
Note the position of each lift pin. They will
have to be returned to that position for reassembly. Push the lift pins up and out of the
top of the liner to remove them.
Before the liner is installed, make sure the outer
surface of the liner is clean and the seat area in
the frame is free of foreign matter. If a new oring is required, lubricate the o-ring and frame
seating area with refrigeration oil. Slide the liner
into the frame and align with the bore. Roll pin
on the top of the liner can be orientated so if an
imaginary line is drawn to opposite pins, it forms
the letter “X”. Seat the liner in the frame recess
firmly by use of Vilter Cylinder Liner Tool (Vilter
Part No. 33464A). A similar tool can be constructed. Be sure to protect the liner lapped
seats to prevent damage.
The assembly of the lift ring is the reverse
order of disassembly. Place the lift ring on a
flat surface with the notches facing up. Put
the liner in the center of the ring, and place a
spring on each roll pin in the ring.
Install a lift pin in each of the 4 slots along
the outside of the liner. The flat on the bottom of the lift pin should be flush to the diameter of the liner. Lift the ring up the liner,
and engage all four lift pin slots in the
notches on the ring. Rotate the ring so the
four springs engage in the holes of the lift
ring stop.
2.
FIGURE 14.
CYLINDER LINER ASSEMBLY TOOL
FIGURE 15.
CYLINDER LINER REMOVAL TOOL
450/450XL Lift Ring Assembly
Invert the liner and place on a flat surface.
Locate the notched end of the snap ring that
retains the lift ring, while pushing down on
the lift ring in this area. Pry the snap ring out
of its groove and continue all the way around
the liner.
Remove the snap ring, and slide the ring up
and off the liner. Now the 8 pins and springs
can be removed from the liner.
Reverse the procedure to install a lift ring
assembly on any 450/450XL liner.
XIV. CRANKSHAFT
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
- 24 -
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
A. General
Removing the crankshaft from the compressor is
basically the same for all units, regardless of
size. Because of a center bearing on all 12 and
16 cylinder compressors and the radius the 8 cylinder throws on the crankshaft, an extra step
must be taken. A crankshaft may be removed
from either end of the compressor. It is, however, easier to take the crankshaft out of the
drive end of the frame. If the crankshaft is taken
out of the pump end, the entire shaft seal must
be removed.
side on the frame. Slip out the spring behind the
tee with a piece of wire. Secure a ½”-13NCx10”
long rod. Screw this into the threads in the end
of the oil feed connector tube. Remove the tube
from the frame with a slight pull on the rod. After
the tube is taken out, separate the nut from the
taper pin in the center bearing and tap the pin out
of its hole. This releases the center bearing and
allows the crankshaft to be removed.
Once the front housing is removed, the crankshaft should be blocked from inside the frame
due to its weight. Adjust the blocking as the work
proceeds so the crankshaft does not bump the
front bore nor make any contact with the journals.
B. Removal From Drive End
Remove any connections that will hinder the removal of the front bearing housing. When disconnecting the front oil line, be prepared to catch
approximately 1 gallon of oil. Remove the shaft
seal and inner retainer.
Replace the two 5/8” (15.88 mm) x 4” (101.6 mm)
socket head screws with threaded studs to support the front housing during removal. Remove
the 65/8” (168.28 mm) x 2” (50.8 mm) cap screws
that hold the housing to the frame. Using the 4”
(101.6 mm) socket head screws, insert them into
the tapped holes on both sides of the housing to
aid in the removal of the front housing from the
frame and off the front bearing. During this process, the housing will have a tendency to hang-up
on the outer diameter of the bearing, thus pulling
the entire shaft with it and possibly disengaging
from the rear housing. Care must be taken to
prevent this from happening. While the front
housing is being removed, push on the crankshaft to be sure it is staying in the rear housing.
On a 458XL and 4516XL compressor, the rear
housing will have to be removed, because the
radius of the counterweight is larger than the radius of the front housing bore. Thus, the shaft
will be hindered from coming straight out of the
frame.
On a 12 or 16 cylinder compressor, the center
bearing must be freed. At this time, remove the
oil circuit piping tee in the middle of the oil cooler
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
- 25 -
To aid in removal, a simple step can be added.
Before removing the shaft from the rear housing,
remove the rear bearing retainer and tap the center hole to 1¼” (31.75 mm) NPT. Reinstall the
retainer on the end of the crankshaft. A 1¼”
(31.75 mm) pipe can be threaded into it and used
as an extension bar for handling the crankshaft
during removal.
C. Removal From The Pump End
To pull the crankshaft from the pump end of the
compressor, remove the pump cover filter
adapter, the complete oil pump assembly and the
rear bearing housing. The crankshaft does need
to be blocked to prevent damage and on 12 and
16 cylinder compressors, the center bearing
needs to be freed.
The shaft seal cover, shaft seal, and inner retainer will also have to be removed. All special
notes apply to this method as well.
D. Servicing The Center Bearing (12 & 16
Cylinders)
The center bearing on this compressor is a split
sleeve type bearing much like connecting rod
bearings. To disassemble the bearing, remove
the four bolts holding the halves of the center
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
bearing housing together. The bearing inserts
are snapped into place and can readily be removed by pushing them out by hand. Clean the
bearing housing thoroughly before installing new
inserts.
Snap the inserts into place. Lubricate the bottom
half with refrigeration oil, and position it on the
crankshaft. Do the same to the upper half, and
locate it using the dowel pins provided. When
aligned, bolt the halves together and tighten with
a torque wrench to the values listed in Table 2, 3
or 4 (depending upon compressor model).
NOTE:
If oil dams are present on the center housing,
they will need to be reinstalled if only changing
the insert bearing. The current center housing
does not require these dams.
E.
Reinstallation
Whichever method was used to remove the
crankshaft, extreme care is needed when placing
the shaft back into the frame. Avoid any damage
to the journals, and block the crankshaft once in
position.
If the crankshaft was removed from the front end
and the rear housing left in place with the oil
pump, it is imperative the locating pin on the rear
bearing align with the slot in the bottom of the
rear housing bore. Also, the pump drive key
must engage with the pump shaft.
If the unit is 12 or 16 cylinder, the center bearing
must be guided into place. Align the hole in the
bearing housing (for the oil feed connector tube)
with hole in the frame. Screw the oil feed connector loosely on the end of the ½” (12.7 mm)
threaded rod, and insert it into the hole. Push the
tube into the bearing housing.
Unscrew the rod from the tube. Place the spring
in the hole and screw in the “tee”. Use thread
sealant. Insert the taper pin it its hole. After
placement, pin must be tightened. This expands
the bearing housing so it fits tightly in the frame
for quiet operation.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
- 26 -
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
MODIFICATION TO FRONT BEARING RETAINER AND FRONT BEARING COVER
AFTER COMPRESSOR SERIAL NUMBER 21354
440 COMPRESSOR ONLY
Compressors below serial number 21355 were
furnished with the front bearing cover assemblies
A30294A (no longer available) for 2, 4, 6 and 8
cylinders, A32162A for 12 and 16 cylinders; front
bearing retainer 38115A for 2, 4, 6 and 8 cylinders; or 33500A for 12 and 16 cylinders (without
the oil hole). Former front bearing retainers
(31885A or 33500A) without oil holes cannot be
used with current bearing cover assemblies
A36240A and A36241A. There is no provision
for oil to get to the bearings.
If front bearing cover is being replaced, a current
front bearing retainer must be ordered also, unless one of these current styles is already being
used. If a current front bearing retainer is used
with former style cover having an oil hole, remove orifice in cover and replace with solid 1/8”
(3.2 mm) flush pipe plug.
SEE SKETCH BELOW FOR LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION
OF OIL HOLE IN CURRENT BEARING RETAINER.
“TOP” STAMPED ON
THIS SURFACE.
45°
OIL HOLE –
3
/16” DIA. ¼” DEEP
0.041” DIA. THRU
ON VERTICAL
CENTERLINE
FIGURE 16.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
RETAINER PARTIAL VERTICAL CROSS SECTION
- 27 -
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
TABLE 2.
ITEM
NO.
102
102
112
112
112
112
121
128
201
209
210
213
215
216
219
224
232
232
236
243
VPN
13152L
13152G
13152C
13152D
13153E
13153D
13152E
13153E
30651B
13264B
13264C
13159E
13153E
13153Q
13153F
31909
1736G
13160D
11396D
1726E
244
247
302
323
326
327
341
342
419
509
510
513
510A
518
518
13253F
31956A
13163E
1689G
13153E
13153F
13153E
13153F
1352D
2027A
2028A
1776B
1472A
31964A
1527B
BOLT SIZE
5
/8 x 3½
5
/8 x 2½
5
/8 x 1½
5
/8 x 1¾
½ x 1½
½ x 1¼
5
/8 x 2
½ x 1½
TORQUE SPECIFICATION
VMC MODEL 440
5
2
5
5
REQUIRED
TORQUE
95 Ft. Lb.
95 Ft. Lb.
95 Ft. Lb.
95 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
95 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
20 Ft. Lb.
20 Ft. Lb.
35 Ft. Lb.
100 Ft. Lb.
100 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
2
2
11 Ft. Lb.
11 Ft. Lb.
2
50 Ft. Lb.
2
2
65 Ft. Lb.
250 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
30 Ft. Lb.
100 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
GRADE
2
2
2
2
5
5
2
5
Plug, ¼ Hex. Pipe Plug
Plug, 3/8 Hex. Pipe Plug
5
/8 x 4
5
/8 x 2
½x4
½ x 1¾
2¼ dia. X 18 Td/in.
5
/16 x 1½
5
/16 x 1
½” Nut
9
/16” Nut
1 x 17/8
¾” Hex Socket Pipe Plug
7
/16 x 2
5
/8 x 2
½ x 1¾
2
2
5
3
/8 x 1
/8 x 24 Nut
3
/8 Palnut
3
/8” Locknut
3
/8” Locknut
3
/8 x 13/8
3
/8 x 1½
3
8
5
3
3
3
20 Ft. Lb.
*
*
25 Ft. Lb.
15-18 Ft. Lb.
15-18 Ft. Lb.
20-25 Ft. Lb.
APPLICATION
Head Bolt with H2O Jacket
Head Bolt without H2O Jacket
Suction Screen Cover
Suction Screen Cover
Suction Screen Cover
Suction Screen Cover
Safety Valve Cover
Handhole Cover
Cap, Valve
Front Bearing Cover
Front Bearing Cover
Front Bearing Retainer
Shaft Seal Cover
Bearing Locknut
Rear Bearing Retainer
Rear Bearing Retainer
(See Item 243)
Center Bearing SupportHalf Bolt
(Used on Item 236
½ x 1 ¾ Bolt
VPN 11396D)
Center Bearing Tapered Pin
Flywheel Hub
Oil Filter Shell
Rear Bearing Cover
Oil Pump Cover
Same as 326
Same as 327
Yoke Assembly
Conn. Rod Cap
Conn. Rod Cap w/Nut Lock
Discharge Valve Retaining
Discharge Valve Retaining
Use with 510A
Use with 513
NOTE:
*
Refer to ‘Connecting Rod Nuts Tightening Instructions – VMC Compressors’ on page 31.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
- 28 -
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
TABLE 3.
ITEM
NO.
102
112
116
121
125
201
209
210
213
215
216
219
224
232
236
243
244
245
247
323
334
335
419
509
510
VPN
13152L
13152C
13152D
13153E
13164E
13264D
13152E
13153E
30641B
13264B
13264C
13159E
13152E
13153Q
13153F
1736G
11396D
1726E
13253F
1603A
31956A
1689G
13152E
13153F
1352D
2027A
2028A
BOLT SIZE
5
/8 x 3½
5
/8 x 1½
5
/8 x 1¾
½ x 1½
¾” Hex. Pipe Plug
½” Hex. Pipe Plug
5
/8 x 2
½ x 1½
TORQUE SPECIFICATION
VMC MODEL 450
GRADE
2
2
2
5
2
5
¼” Hex. Pipe Plug
/8” Hex. Pipe Plug
5
/8 x 4
5
/8 x 2
½x4
½ x 1¾
3
5
2
5
5
5
/16 x 1½
½ x 1¾
½” Nut (Item 236)
9
/16” Nut
¼x½
1 x 17/8
7
/16 x 2
5
/8 x 2
½ x 1¾
3
/8 x 1
3
/8 x 24 Nut
3
/8 Palnut
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
5
8
REQUIRED
TORQUE
95 Ft. Lb.
95 Ft. Lb.
95 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
50 Ft. Lb.
95 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
20 Ft. Lb.
20 Ft. Lb.
35 Ft. Lb.
100 Ft. Lb.
100 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
11 Ft. Lb.
(See Item 243)
50 Ft. Lb.
65 Ft. Lb.
6 Ft. Lb.
250 Ft. Lb.
30 Ft. Lb.
95 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
20 Ft. Lb.
*
*
APPLICATION
Cylinder Head
Suction Screen Cover
Suction Screen Cover
Suction Screen Cover
Plug
Plug
Safety Valve Cover
Handhole Cover
Valve Cap
Front Bearing Cover
Front Bearing Cover
Front Bearing Cover
Front Bearing Cover
Front Bearing Retainer
Shaft Seal Cover
Bearing Locknut
Rear Bearing Retainer
Bearing Support
Bearing Support Half
Flywheel Hub
Oil Filter Shell
Rear Bearing Cover
Oil Pump
Yoke Assembly
Connection Rod Cap
Connection Rod Cap
NOTE:
*
Refer to ‘Connecting Rod Nuts Tightening Instructions – VMC Compressors’ on page 31.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
- 29 -
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
TABLE 4.
ITEM
NO.
102
112
116
121
125
201
209
210
213
215
216
219
224
232
236
243
244
247
323
334
335
419
504
505
VPN
13152L
13152E
13153E
13264E
13264D
13152E
13153E
30651B
13264B
13264C
13159E
13153E
13153Q
13153F
KT 367
1736G
13153F
1726E
13253F
31956A
1689G
13153E
13153F
1352D
2027A
2028A
BOLT SIZE
5
/8 x 3½
5
/8 x 2
½ x 1½
¾” Hex Pipe Plug
½” Hex Pipe Plug
5
/8 x 2
½ x 1½
TORQUE SPECIFICATION
VMC MODEL 450XL
5
2
5
5
REQUIRED
TORQUE
95 Ft. Lb.
95 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
50 Ft. Lb.
95 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
20 Ft. Lb.
20 Ft. Lb.
35 Ft. Lb.
100 Ft. Lb.
100 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
2
11 Ft. Lb.
2
2
2
2
2
5
50 Ft. Lb.
65 Ft. Lb.
250 Ft. Lb.
30 Ft. Lb.
95 Ft. Lb.
75 Ft. Lb.
20 Ft. Lb.
*
*
GRADE
2
2
5
2
5
¼” Hex Pipe Plug
/8” Hex Pipe Plug
5
/8 x 4
5
/8 x 2
½x4
½ x 1¾
3
5
/16 x 1½
½ x 1¾
½” Nut
9
/16” Nut
1 x 17/8
7
/16 x 2
5
/8 x 2
½ x 1¾
3
/8 x 1
3
/8 x 24 Nut
3
/8“ Palnut
8
APPLICATION
Cylinder Head
Suction Screen Cover
Suction Screen Cover
Plug
Plug
Safety Valve Cover
Handhole Cover
Valve Cap
Front Bearing Cover
Front Bearing Cover
Front Bearing Cover
Front Bearing Cover
Front Bearing Retainer
Shaft Seal Cover
Bearing Locknut
Rear Bearing Retainer
Machine Bolt
Bearing Support Half
Flywheel Hub
Oil Filter Shell
Rear Bearing Cover
Oil Pump
Yoke Assembly
Connection Rod Cap
Connection Rod Cap
NOTE:
*
Refer to ‘Connecting Rod Nuts Tightening Instructions – VMC Compressors’ on page 31.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
- 30 -
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
CONNECTING ROD NUTS TIGHTENING INSTRUCTIONS
VMC COMPRESSORS
All VMC Compressor connecting rod bolts use a plain nut with a spring steel locknut (“Palnut©”) combination.
PLAIN NUTS
Plain nuts may be re-used. Torque the plain nuts as follows:
Torque Value
18 to 21 ft. lb. (24 to 28 Nm)
30 to 35 ft. lb. (41 to 48 Nm)
30 to 35 ft. lb. (41 to 48 Nm)
Connecting Rod Assembly
A33171A (Aluminum)
A31045D (Steel)
A34762A (Steel)
LOCK NUTS
New, unused locknuts (“Palnuts”) must be used each time the connecting rods are serviced. After the plain nut is
torqued to the specified value, assemble the palnut to the rod bolt with the open end of the hexagon pointing away
from the hex, plain nut.
CAUTION:
OPEN END MUST POINT AWAY FROM PLAIN NUT. If palnut is installed the other way, it will not lock and
will eventually work loose, during operation.
Turn the palnut until the mating parts are pulled together and tightening begins. Final tightening and locking of the
palnut is achieved by an additional 1/3 to 1 /2 (maximum) turn. Order spare palnuts by Vilter part number 2028A.
SOCKET
A special, shallow hexagon socket is available for easier assembly. This socket is 7/8” in diameter, 2¼” long and has
a 3/8” square socket drive. The socket is specially made for this type of nut, allowing more convenient gripping and
tightening of the palnut. Order Vilter part number 2040A.
TORQUE LIMIT ADAPTOR
Also available is a torque limit adaptor. This lightweight, compact, rugged, and square male drive tool is factory set
to a predetermined torque value. Use with any socket driving device. The adaptor allows the accurate torquing of
the plain nut to the specified value in the confined crankcase space. One adaptor is needed for each different connecting rod. Order by part number listed below:
Adaptor Part No.
2287A
2287B
2287B
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
Drive
3
/8”
½”
½”
Overall Dimension
13/8”
15/8”
15/8”
- 31 -
Torque Limit Setting
19 ft. lb. (26 Nm)
33 ft. lb. (45 Nm)
33 ft. lb. (45 Nm)
Use w/Rod
A33171A
A31045D
A34762A
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
TABLE 5.
ITEM
1
FACTORY RUNNING DIMENSIONS, TOLERANCES, CLEARANCES & ALLOWABLE WEAR
LIMITS FOR 440, 450 & 450XL VMC COMPRESSORS
PART NAME
Crankshaft
Main Brg. Journal
Drive End
Pump End
2
Timken Bearings
I.D.
Drive End
Pump End
Mounted
COMPRESSOR
SIZE
DIMENSION
TOLERANCE
CLEARANCE
2, 4, 6, 8
8 HD, 12, 16
450XL – ALL
2.8145 Dia.
3.1895 Dia.
+.000
-.001
+.000
-.001
-.0015
.0000
-.0020
-.0005
ALL
2.8140 Dia.
+.000
-.001
-.0015
.0000
2, 4, 6, 8
8 HD, 12, 16
450XL – ALL
2.8125
3.1875
+.0005
-.0000
PRESS
FIT
ONTO
SHAFT
ALL
2.8125
+.0005
-.0000
2, 4, 6, 8
.0073
.0002
.0074
.0008
.0071
8 HD, 12, 16
450XL – ALL
1
Crankshaft
Crankpin
Std. Size
.015” U.S.
.030 U.S.
Std. Size
.015” U.S.
.030” U.S.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
ALL
Except 450XL
ALL
Except 450XL
ALL
Except 450XL
2.874 Dia.
450XL
All Models
450XL (ALL)
450XL (ALL)
3.124
.0068
2.859
.0073
.0002
.0074
.0008”
MAXIMUM
ALLOWABLE
WEAR
NONE
NONE
.009”
MAX.
END
PLAY
.0015
to
.0036
2.844
+.000
-.001
.002
3.109
3.094
- 32 -
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
TABLE 5.
ITEM
3
FACTORY RUNNING DIMENSIONS, TOLERANCES, CLEARANCES & ALLOWABLE WEAR
LIMITS FOR 440, 450 & 450XL VMC COMPRESSORS (cont’d)
PART NAME
Connecting Rod
I.D.
w/Large End
Brgs. Installed
Std.
W/.015” U.S.
Brgs. Installed
W/.030” U.S.
Brgs. Installed
4
3
1
4
Shell Bearing
Thickness
Std.
.015” U.S.
.030 U.S.
Connecting Rod
Width
Side
Clearance
Crankshaft
Center Brg.
O.D.
Shell Bearings
I.D.
Thickness
5
Piston
6
Cylinder Bore
O.D.
7
Frame Bore
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
COMPRESSOR
SIZE
ALL
Except 450XL
450XL (ALL)
ALL
Except 450XL
450XL (ALL)
ALL
Except 450XL
450XL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
DIMENSION
TOLERANCE
CLEARANCE
2.8755
+.0011
-.0000
.0015
to
.0036
3.1255
2.8605
3.1105
.001
2.8455
3.0955
.0750
.0825
.0900
+.0000
-.0003
.994”
.993”
.006”
Each rod
.001”
.001”
No Scuffing
+.001”
.001”
3.999
+.000
-.001
12, 16
4.0010
.1255
4.4955 *
ALL
MAXIMUM
ALLOWABLE
WEAR
4.500
5.9965
5.9955
6.000
- 33 -
+.0026
-.0000
+.0000
-.0003
+.000
-.001
+.001
-.000
.001
+.001
-.000
None
(Brg. to Rod)
.0020
to
.0046
Theoretical
Vertical
.0045
to
.0065
.0035”
to
.0055”
(Loose)
.0005
.002”
.0005”
.001”
.005”
.005”
None
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
TABLE 5.
ITEM
5
3
8
9
6
FACTORY RUNNING DIMENSIONS, TOLERANCES, CLEARANCES & ALLOWABLE WEAR
LIMITS FOR 440, 450 & 450XL VMC COMPRESSORS (cont’d)
COMPRESSOR
SIZE
ALL
(Except 450XL)
DIMENSION
TOLERANCE
1.1250
1.1248
.0002
450XL
(ALL)
1.1241
1.1238
.0003
Pin Dia.
ALL
1.1250
Connecting Rod
Pin Bushing (I.D.)
ALL
1.1257
1.1254
.0003
.013/.025
.012
.013/.023
.010
.002/,004
.0015/,004
.002
.0025
Meas.
In
Piston
Groove
.061”
.036”
To
.026”
±.003”
None
.010”
None
.134”
To
.132”
.002”
None
.035”
.012”
.023”
.012”
PART NAME
Piston Pin Bore
Rings, Piston
End Gap
Compression
Oil (Solid)
Oil (Flex)
Oil (Rails)
Fit in Groove
Compression
Oil (Solid)
Oil (Flex)
With Rails
Suction Valve
Thickness
Cylinder
Valve Seat
Height
*
Finger
Tight
(Dry)
Tight
.0007
.0012
See Above
Pin Bore
.0004
to
.0009
Meas.
In
4.500 Bore
MAXIMUM
ALLOWABLE
WEAR
Drops
thru
None
.0005”
.001”
.025”
.025”
ALL
ALL
ALL
To Top of Liner
Piston Top to Bottom
Of Safety Head
+.0000
-.0002
CLEARANCE
ALL
.002
None
None
(Lapped
Flat to
Seat)
None
(Lapped
Flat to
Seat)
Must be
Measured.
Minimum
.010”
Dimension does not apply to assembled 450XL piston on connecting rod (piston shrink fit to wrist pin).
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
- 34 -
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
TABLE 5.
ITEM
10
FACTORY RUNNING DIMENSIONS, TOLERANCES, CLEARANCES & ALLOWABLE WEAR
LIMITS FOR 440, 450 & 450XL VMC COMPRESSORS (cont’d)
PART NAME
Discharge Valve
Thickness
Height of
Disch. Valve Seat
11
Oil Pump
Axial Clearance
(#2 Pump)
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
COMPRESSOR
SIZE
DIMENSION
TOLERANCE
CLEARANCE
MAXIMUM
ALLOWABLE
WEAR
440 ALL
450 ALL
.030”
.040”
±.001”
±.002”
None
None
None
None
ALL
1/32”
±.010”
None
Measured
From Head
To Rail
.005”
Minimum
Height
ALL
.003”
.006”
.003”
.003”
.006”
- 35 -
.002”
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
VILTER MultiCylinder Compressor
FIGURE 17.
400 Series VMC
SERVICE
TYPICAL 400 SERIES COMPRESSOR VERTICAL CROSS SECTION AND
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
- 36 -
2/01
Replaces all Previous Issues
February 2001
Replaces
May 1985
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
SECTION 100-R
PAGE 1
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
(Note: Except where noted in the description column,
part listed apply to all 450XL High Stage, Booster, and
Two-Stage Compressors.)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
2
3
4
5
9
10
9
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
REPLACEMENT PARTS ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS
BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration, 2 Cylinder (Figure 1)
Illustration, 4, 6 & 8 Cylinder (Figure 2)
Illustration, 12 & 16 Cylinder (Figure 3)
Parts List
DISCHARGE/SUCTION GAUGE
Illustration (Figure 4)
Parts List
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration (Figure 5)
Parts List
REAR BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration (Figure 6)
Parts List
CYLINDER LINER AND CAPACITY CONTROL REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration (Figure 7)
Parts List
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY AND SAFETY HEAD REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration (Figure 8)
Parts List
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST
REPLACEMENT PARTS ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS
1.
Give the size, voltage, original order number and serial number of the compressor. All of this information is
stamped on the nameplate attached to the compressor frame. The serial number is also stamped on the
compressor frame. The compressor frame serial number location is directly above the suction flange on the
frame of the compressor or directly above the rear bearing cover. The rear bearing is located on the oil
pump/filter end of the compressor.
2.
Always give the name of the part as well as the corresponding part number and/or item number. Also
include the quantity of parts required.
3.
Should there be a doubt regarding the part number or name, send a sketch of the part required or return the
old part as a sample, transportation charges prepaid. Orders on which part numbers and description do not
agree will be filled according to our best interpretation.
4.
All prices are F.O.B. factory. Minimum domestic parts order is $75.00 net price.
5.
Please indicate on the order preferred method of shipment. We will follow your instructions unless it is to
your best interest to change routing.
6.
If you purchased the compressor from a party other than Vilter Manufacturing Corporation, please state
when you purchased the compressor and from whom.
*
Patents Pending
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
PRINTED IN U.S.A.
SECTION 100-R
PAGE 2
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
2 CYLINDER BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 1
* PATENTS PENDING
February 2001
Replaces
May 1985
February 2001
Replaces
May 1985
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
4, 6 AND 8 CYLINDER BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 2
* PATENTS PENDING
SECTION 100-R
PAGE 3
SECTION 100-R
PAGE 4
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
12 AND 16 CYLINDER BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 3
* PATENTS PENDING
February 2001
Replaces
May 1985
February 2001
Replaces
May 1985
SECTION 100-R
PAGE 5
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
ITEM
101
102
102
103
104
105
106
107
107
107A
107A
108
DESCRIPTION
Frame
5
Screw, /8” x 3½” Hex Head Cap
(Used with Water Jacket)
5
Screw, /8” x 2½” Hex Head Cap
(Used when Water Jacket not used)
Cover, Water Jacket (Ammonia and R22)
Gasket, Water Jacket (Ammonia and R22)
Cover, Cylinder
Banks w/o Capacity Reduction
Banks w/Capacity Reduction (Oil Act.)
Banks w/Capacity Reduction (Gas Act.)
Banks w/o Capacity Reduction
Banks w/Capacity Reduction (Oil Act.)
Banks w/Capacity Reduction (Gas Act.)
Banks w/o Capacity Reduction (Two-Stage)
Gasket, Cylinder Cover
5
Stud, /8” x 3” (shown only on 2 cylinder)
Stud, ¾” x 3¼” (not shown)
Nut, 5/8-11NC-2B
Nut, ¾-10NC-2B
Tee, Suction (++)
2½” x 2½”
3½” x 3”
Elbow, Discharge (++)
2” x 2” (Ammonia)
2½” x 2½” (Ammonia)
3” x 3” (Ammonia)
4” x 3” (Ammonia)
Suction Screen
Suction Screen
Suction Screen
Bag, Suction Screen (not shown)
Bag, Suction Screen (not shown)
Bag, Suction Screen (not shown)
Gasket, Suction Screen Cover
Gasket, Suction Screen Cover
Gasket, Suction Cover
Cover, Suction Screen
Cover, Suction Screen
Cover, Suction Screen
5
Screw, /8” x 2” Hex Head Cap
Screw, ½” x ½” Hex Head Cap
Valve, ½” Oil Charge and Drain (Ammonia)
Valve, ½” Oil Charge and Drain (Halocarbon)
Nipple, ½” x 4” Sch. 80 Pipe
Gasket, Crankcase Oil Screen
Crankcase Oil Screen Assembly
Plug, ¾” Hex Head Pipe (not shown on 12 & 16)
Plug, ½” Hex Head Pipe (not shown on 2 thru 8)
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
2
4
6
8
12
16
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART
NUMBER
+
20
40
60
80
120
160
13152L
20
1
1
40
2
2
60
3
3
80
4
4
120
6
6
160
8
8
13152G
30299A
33329A
---1
1**
1**
-1
8
--
1
1**
1
----2
4
4
---1
2**
2**
3
3
4
4
2
2**
2
----4
4
4
---2
4**
4
6
6
8
--
4
4**
4
----8
8
--
--
4
4
4
--
--
A30332A
30332B
30332G
A30364A
30364B
30364G
A30364A
33330A
13156D
13157D
1726G
1726H
1
--
-1
---
---
---
---
A30319A
A32417B
1
-------1
-1
--1
---6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-1
--1
--1
----1
--1
5
-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
--1
-----2
-2
--2
---12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
---1
-1
--3
-2
-1
2
-1
5
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
--2
---2
--2
-2
--2
--16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
--2
---2
--2
-2
--2
--16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12270E
12270F
12271E
A32498A
A32428A
A32428D
A32565A
A33474A
A33474B
A33474G
31892A
33493A
11323J
31893A
33492A
13706A
13152E
2796E
1956B
1956A
13189G
31889A
A31886A
13264E
13264D
109
109
109
109-A
109-A
109-A
110
110
110
111
111
111
112
112
113
113
113-A
114
115
116 ++
116 ++
NOTES:
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, quantities shown are for compressors with standard capacity reduction, and may vary if compressor is
equipped with other versions. See Page 13 for application notes.
*
Patents Pending.
**
Items shown are for compressors with optional oil unloading or optional single cylinder unloading. See Page 15 for application notes.
+
Part Number on application.
++
May not be shown, or only shown typically on one illustration.
SECTION 100-R
PAGE 6
February 2001
Replaces
May 1985
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
ITEM
117
118
119
120
121
122
122
123 &
124
DESCRIPTION
Pin Assembly, Crankcase Oil Screen Retaining
Safety Valve (Internal Relief)
Gasket, 2” Flange
Cover, Safety Valve
5
Screw, /8” x 2” Hex Head Cap
Gasket, Handhole Cover (Chain)
Gasket, Handhole Cover (Strip)
Handhole Cover and 2” Sight Glass Assy
With openings for:
560W NEMA 1 & 7 Htr., F.V. & Therm.
560W NEMA 1 & 7 Heater and Therm.
Cover, Handhole (with openings)
Cover, Handhole (without openings) (not shown)
Glass, Oil Sight – 2”
Screw, ½” x 1½” Hex Head Cap
Tube, Oil Feed Connector
Spring
Hex Head Plug Long Shank Unloader Hold Down
Hex Head Plug Short Unloader Hold Down
123
123A
124
125
126
127
135
136
NOTES:
*
Patents Pending.
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
-1
16
----
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
4
6
8
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
4
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
-1
16
----
1
1
1
-1
16
--1
1
1
1
-1
16
----
1
1
1
1
1
32
1
1
2
16
1
2
2
2
4
2
2
PART
NUMBER
A31936A
1721C
11323G
31954A
13152E
35382A
31894A
1
1
1
1
1
32
1
1
--
A33034G
A33034L
Order Assy
33034B
1484A
2796E
33494A
31789A
35166A
February 2001
Original Issue
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
DISCHARGE / SUCTION GAUGE REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 4
•
PATENTS PENDING
SECTION 100-R
PAGE 7
SECTION 100-R
PAGE 8
February 2001
Original Issue
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
DISCHARGE / SUCTION GAUGE REPLACEMENT PARTS
ITEM
128
128
129
129
130
131
133
134
*
DESCRIPTION
Heater, Electric Crankcase Oil, 115V (not shown)
Heater, Electric Crankcase Oil, 230V (not shown)
Gauge, Discharge, 300 PSI
Gauge, Suction, 150 PSI
Stedy-Mount®
Connector, ¼” MPT x ¼” O.D. Compression
Nipple ¼” x 4” Sch. 80 Pipe
Thermometer, Crankcase Oil (not shown)
Patents Pending.
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
4
6
8
12
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
16
2
2
2
1
3
3
3
1
PART
NUMBER
2069J
2069K
1204E
1204C
A17311SS
13229D
13181G
1467F
February 2001
Replaces
May 1985
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
SECTION 100-R
PAGE 9
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 5
PATENTS PENDING
SECTION 100-R
PAGE 10
February 2001
Replaces
May 1985
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
Front Bearing Cover and Relief Valve Assy
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
2
4
6
8
12
16
1
1
1
1
1
1
Cap, Valve
Oil Relief Valve Kit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
17355A
KT486
Gasket, Valve Cap
Nut, Packing
Washer
7
39
3
Packing, /8” O.D. x /64” I.D. x /8”
Stem, Valve
Spring
5
Ball, /8” dia. Steel
Front Bearing Cover Assembly
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
30651C
31048A
31048D
31048E
31048C
31048F
13155K
A36241A
Plug, ¼” Hex Head Pipe
3
Plug, /8” Hex Head Pipe
Cover, Front Bearing
Shield, Splash
3
Screw, Hexagon Hd. No. 10-32 x /8” long
Gasket, Bearing Cover
5
Screw, /8” x 4” Hex Socket Head Cap
Retainer, Front Bearing (with Oil Hole)
5
Screw, /8” x 2” Hex Head Cap
Screw, ½” x 4” Hex Head Cap
Seal and Gasket Kit
Seal, Rotary Shaft Assembly
Gasket, Shaft Seal Cover
Screw, ½” x 1¾” Hex Head Cap
Cover and Tube Assembly, Shaft Seal
Drain Tube
Crankshaft and Bearings Assembly *
Crankshaft and Bearings Assembly *
Crankshaft and Bearings Assembly *
Crankshaft and Bearings Assembly *
Crankshaft and Bearings Assembly Kit *
Crankshaft and Bearings Assembly Kit *
Locknut and Retaining Compound Kit
Front Bearing and Retaining Compound Kit
Ring, Front Bearing Retainer
Crankshaft and Retaining Compound Kit *
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
6
3
1
1
1
8
1
1
1
-----1
1
1
--
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
6
3
1
1
1
8
1
1
-1
----1
1
1
--
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
6
3
1
1
1
8
1
1
--1
---1
1
1
--
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
6
3
1
1
1
8
1
1
---1
--1
1
1
--
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
6
3
1
1
1
8
1
1
----1
-1
1
1
--
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
6
3
1
1
1
8
1
1
-----1
1
1
1
--
13264B
13264C
Order Assy
35274A
2583A
31890A
13159E
33500A
13152E
2796EV
KT509
A33489A
33496A
2796EL
A32564A
35078A
A34555HX
A34555KX
A34555LX
A34555BX
KT588
KT589
KT367
KT369
33145A
See
Assembly
Above
ITEM
201 thru
211
201
202 thru
208
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209 thru
211
209
210
211
211B
211C
212
213
214
215
216
217 & 218
217
218
219
220 & 220A
220A
224
Thru
233
224 thru
244 less +
224
227
228
229
DESCRIPTION
NOTES:
+
Less items 234, 235 and 241.
*
Patents Pending.
PART
NUMBER
A32566A
February 2001
Replaces
May 1985
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
SECTION 100-R
PAGE 11
May 1985
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
2
1
1
4
1
----------1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
4
6
8
12
3
3
3
5
2
2
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
---1
---2
---4
---2
---2
---1
---1
---4
---4
---1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
229A
Plug, /8” Pipe, Hex Socket Head (not shown)
229B
Plug, ¾” Pipe, Hex Socket Head (not shown)
231
Retainer, Rear Bearing
231A&231B Rear Bearing and Lock Pin Kit
5
232
Screw, /16” x 1½” Hex Head Cap
233
Crank, Oil Pump Drive
234
Cap, Bearing Support
235
Pin, ¼” x 1” Dowel
236
Bolt, ½” x 1¾” Machine
237
Bearing, Upper Right Half or Lower Left Half
238
Bearing, Upper Left Half or Lower Right Half
240
Pin, Threaded Taper
241
Case, Bearing Support
242
Washer, ½” Spring Lock
243
Nut, ½” Hex
9
244
Nut, /16” Hex
246
Key, Crankshaft
247
Screw, Flywheel Hub
248
Washer, Flywheel Hub Screw
249
Gauge, Oil Pressure, 300 PSI
®
250
Stedy-Mount
251
Valve, ¼” Screw End Globe
252
Nipple, ¼” x 7” Sch. 80 Pipe
253
Connector, ¼” MPT x ¼” O.D. Compression
254
Tee, ¼”
255
Nipple, ¼” x 2” Sch. 80 Pipe
NOTES:
*
Patents Pending.
**
Matched set with pins, sold as assembly A32163A. Shown in fiveparts to illustrate disassembly.
16
5
4
1
1
4
1
1
2
4
2
2
1
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART
NUMBER
13163A
2606A
31904A
KT353
1736G
33403A
**
13162X **
2796EL **
33508A
33508B
33497A
**
13165F
1726E **
13253F
33505B
31956A
33495A
1204E
A17311SS
A11392A
13181M
13229D
1098B
13181C
SECTION 100-R
PAGE 12
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
REAR BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 6
PATENTS PENDING
* DO NOT DISASSEMBLE CENTER TUBE –
FACTORY PRESET RELIEF VALVE
February 2001
Replaces
May 1985
February 2001
Replaces
May 1985
SECTION 100-R
PAGE 13
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
REAR BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
ITEM
301 thru
304 & 333
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
309
310 ***
310 **
311 ***
311A,312,
313 & 314
311A, 312
Thru 314 &
315A thru
319 & 321
311A **
312
313
314
315 ***
315A **
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
322A
322B
323
324 ***
324 **
Rear Bearing Cover Assembly Kit
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
2
4
6
8
12
16
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART
NUMBER
KT092
Cover, Rear Bearing
Plug, ¾” Hex Socket Head Pipe
3
Pin, /8” x 1” Dowel
Orifice, Oil Metering (not shown)
Gasket, Oil Pump Body
Oil Pump Assembly
Gasket, Oil Pump Cover
Gasket, Oil Pump and Rear Bearing Cover Seal
Cover, Oil Pump and Filter Head (R12 & R502)
Cover, Oil Pump and Filter Head (R717 & R22)
Filter Assy., Complete (without Bypass Relief)
Filter Assy., Complete (with Bypass Relief)
Spool Assembly (without Bypass Relief)
Spool – Strainer Tube Assembly
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Order Kit
13163E
2868H
33361A
31899A
A33480A
31900A
33320A
34565A
34760AB
A35241A
A35240A
2046A
1448U
Filter Assembly (without Shell)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1448T
Spool Assembly (with Bypass Relief)
Seal, Spool End
Strainer Tube
Ring, Retaining
Recharge (for A35241A & 2046A) (w/o Bypass) †
Recharge (for A35240A & 1448J) (with Bypass) †
Pressure Plate Assembly
Pressure Plate
‘O’ Ring Seal, Pressure Plate
Spring, Pressure Plate
1
Plug, Steel Hexagon Head /8” Pipe
Gasket, Oil Filter Head
Filter Shell with Flange and Plug
Flange, Oil Filter Tank
Tank, Oil Filter
7
Screw, Hexagon Head Cap /16” x 2”
Instruction/Nameplate (for use with A35241A)
(not shown)
Instruction/Nameplate (for use with A35240A)
(not shown)
Gauge, 2½”, 0-300 PSI, Oil Filter
Elbow, ¼” 90° Female Compression
Tubing, ¼” O.D. Steel
Tubing, ¼” O.D. Steel (“AR” – As Required)
Tee, ¼” Compression
Connector, ¼” MPT x ¼” O.D. Compression
Connector, ¼” MPT x ¼” O.D. Compression
Valve, 3-Way, Oil Filter
Bracket, Valve
Control, Pressure Differential
Gasket, Bearing Cover
5
Screw, /8” x 2” Hexagon Head Cap
Screw, ½” x 1¾” Hexagon Head Cap
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1448J
1448H
1448K
1448L
2115C †
1448C †
1448M
1448N
1448P
1448Q
13264A
1448B
A34623A
35125A
34623A
1689G
40680AJ
1
1
1
1
1
1
40680AT
1
1
3ft
AR
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
10
8
1
1
3ft
AR
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
10
8
1
1
3ft
AR
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
10
8
1
1
3ft
AR
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
10
8
2047A
1892B
S1589AA
S1589AA
13239C
13229D
13229D
2030A
35106A
1643V
31890A
13152E
2796EL
DESCRIPTION
325
1
1
326
1
1
327
3ft
3ft
327A ***
AR
AR
328 ***
2
2
329
2
2
329A ***
2
2
330
1
1
331
1
1
332 ***
1
1
333
1
1
334
10
10
335
8
8
NOTES:
*
Patents Pending.
**
Filter with bypass relief is standard. These items are used.
***
Filter without bypass relief is optional. When supplied, these items are used.
†
Replacement recharge also includes gasket 1448B (Item 321).
SECTION 100-R
PAGE 14
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
CYLINDER LINER AND CAPACITY CONTROL REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 7
* PATENTS PENDING
December 2001
Replaces
February 2001
December 2001
Replaces
February 2001
SECTION 100-R
PAGE 15
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
CYLINDER LINER AND CAPACITY CONTROL REPLACEMENT PARTS
ITEM
401, 402
& 403
401, 402
Thru 408
401A, 402,
403 & 408A
401A, 402
Thru 408A
401
401A
402
403
405
405A +
405B +
406
407
408
408A
409
410A/B &
411
410 & 411
410
410A
410B
411
413 thru
420
413
414
414
415
416
417
418
DESCRIPTION
Cylinder Liner Assembly
(for cylinder without unloading)
Cylinder Liner Assembly
(for cylinder with unloading)
Cylinder Liner Assembly (Two-Stage only)
(for cylinder without unloading)
Cylinder Liner Assembly (Two-Stage only)
(for cylinder with unloading)
Liner, Cylinder
Liner, Cylinder (Two-Stage only)
Seal, ‘O’ Ring (upper)
Pin, Roll, 0.125” dia. x 1½” lg.
Ring, Lift
Ring, Lift
Pin, Roll
Spring, Lift
Pin, Lift
Retainer, Lift Ring
Seal, ‘O’ Ring (lower – Two-Stage only)
Plate, Suction Valve
Piston & Rings Assy., Cap Red (Oil †)
Piston & Rings Assy., Cap Red (Gas †)
Ring Set (PTFE & rubber)
Seal, Unload Piston (Oil only)
Ring, Retaining Unload Piston (Oil only)
Piston, Unloader (Gas or Oil)
Complete Capacity Control Mechanism Assembly *
(Low Suction R717 and all Booster)
Arm, Yoke Lifting
Yoke Assembly (2 Cylinder and Two-Stage only)
Yoke Assembly
3
11
Pin, /8” x /16” lg. Roll
Pin, Short Pivot
Spring, Unloader Yoke
Yoke Guide Assembly
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
2
4
6
8
12
16
PART
NUMBER
2(1**)
2
2
4
4
8
KT475
-(1**)
2
4
4
8
8
KT476
--
--
6(3**)
--
12(6**)
--
A35108D
-2
-2
8
-(1**)
1
4
-(8**)
-(8**)
-(1**)
-2
-(1**)
-4
-4
16
2
2
4
16
16`
2
-4
1
-(3**)
6
6
6
24
4(3**)
4
4
32(24**)
32(24**)
4(3**)
6
6
2(3**)
-8
-8
32
4
4
4
32
32
4
-8
2
-(6**)
12
12
12
48
8(6**)
8
4
64(48**)
64(48**)
8(6***)
12
12
4(6**)
-16
-16
64
8
8
4
64
64
8
-16
4
A35108C
34510A
34710A
2176BH
1193Q
35071A
35380A
1193SS
35069A
35070A
1971A
2176BL
31909A
A35315BX
-(1**)
-(1**)
1
1
-(1**)
--
1
1
1
1
1
1
2(3**)
2(3**)
1
1
2(3**)
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
4(6**)
4(6**)
1
1
4(6**)
4
4
4
1
1
4
4
A35315CX
2557A
2639A
2638A
Order Assy
A41788BX
-(1**)
-(1**)
--(1**)
-(1**)
-(4**)
--
1
-1
1
1
4
1
2(3**)
-(3**)
2
2(3**)
2(3**)
8(12**)
2
2
-2
2
2
8
2
4(6**)
-(6**)
4
4(6**)
4(6**)
16(24**)
4
4
-4
4
4
16
4
41725A
A33575A
A33335A
1193X
33250B
33686A
A33347A
NOTES:
*
Patents Pending.
**
Two cylinder high stage and 6 & 12 cylinder Two-Stage Compressor only:
Unloading is NOT standard. When supplied as an option, single cylinder unloading is provided on 50% of the cylinders. These items
and quantities in ( ) are then used. Also, for single cylinder unloading, the yoke assembly (Part Number A33575A) and two pins on
the Yoke Guide Assembly (Part Number A33576A) have drill and tapped holes to accommodate screw (Item 419) and spacers (Item
420).
***
Parts quantities are listed for standard unloading only (except 2 cylinder and two-stage, see note **). Standard unloading on
compressors with 2 cylinders is none; 4 cylinders is 50%; 6 cylinders is 33 & 66%; 8 cylinders is 25 & 50%; 12 cylinders is 33 & 66%;
16 cylinders is 25 & 50%; and two-stage is none. See Operation Section for other unloading options.
†
Actuation type presently on your compressor can be determined by checking unloading solenoid valve – oil uses three-way valves, gas
uses two-way valves. Gas unloading was considered standard on all high-stage compressors, except those with 100% capacity
reduction. Oil unloading is standard on high-stage compressors with 100% capacity reduction, all boosters and two-stage
compressors with capacity reduction.
+
If a single cylinder unloader mechanism serviced uses pivot bolts to hold down one half them mechanism, it should be replaced by
405A and 405B.
SECTION 100-R
PAGE 16
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
AND SAFETY HEAD REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 8
•
PATENTS PENDING.
February 2001
Replaces
May 1985
February 2001
Replaces
May 1985
SECTION 100-R
PAGE 17
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
AND SAFETY HEAD REPLACEMENT PARTS
Piston Rings and Connecting Rod Assy Kit
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
2
4
6
8
12
16
2
4
6
8
12
16
Piston Ring, Compression
Piston Ring, Oil
Piston and Connecting Rod Assy
Bearing Half and Lock Nut Kit
6
2
2
2
12
4
4
4
18
6
6
6
24
8
8
8
36
12
12
12
48
16
16
16
31989M
31989N
**
KT575
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
8
8
8
4
4
4
4
12
12
12
6
6
6
6
16
16
16
8
8
8
8
24
24
24
12
12
12
12
32
32
32
16
16
16
16
2028A
2027A
31955A
Order KT575
Order KT575
35252A
KT543
2
4
6
8
12
16
31941B
16
2
6
2
2
8
2
8
2
2
8
-
32
4
12
4
4
16
4
16
4
4
16
-
4
48
6
18
12
6
2
6
2
24
6
24
6
6
4
4
24
16
64
8
24
8
8
32
8
32
8
8
32
-
8
96
12
36
24
12
4
12
4
48
12
48
12
12
8
8
48
32
128
16
48
16
16
64
16
64
16
16
64
-
31941B
33803A
35080SS
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
501 thru
508
501
502
503
504, 507
& 508
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
520
511
512
515B
513 &
514
513
514
515
513 thru
518
519
NOTES:
*
**
***
†
#
3
Lock Nut, /8”, Connecting Rod
3
Nut, Plain Hex /8”-UNF
Bolt, Connecting Rod
Bearing Half, Connecting Rod (upper)
Bearing Half, Connecting Rod (lower)
Spring, Safety Head
Safety Head Yoke Kit (includes 4 of item 513)
BoosterSafety Head Yoke
2-Stage Low sideSafety Head Yoke
Spring, Valve
Plate, Discharge Valve
Valve, Diaphragm Discharge (Booster)
2-Stage Low Side
Safety Hd. & Pins Assy (Std. Ammonia)
Safety Hd. & Pins Assy (2- Stage High Side Comp.)
Safety Hd. & Pins Assy (#) (Halo)
Safety Hd. & Pins Assy (2- Stage High Side Comp.)
11
Pin, Roll, 0.187” dia. x /16” lg. †
Safety Head-STD.XL
Spring, Valve
Booster- Safety Head- Ammonia
Booster- Safety Head- Halo
2- Stage Low Side-Safety Head- Ammonia
2- Stage Low Side- Safety Head- Halo
Spring, Valve (Booster)
2- Stage Low Side
PART
NUMBER
KT573 **
31939B
A35082A
A35272A
1712F
***
33803A
A32695C
A32695D
A32695C
A32695D
33803A
Patents Pending.
Piston, wrist pin and connecting rod sold only as a kit.
Shown for disassembly purposes only, order assembly.
Install with pin’s outside longitudinal seam facing outside diameter of safety head.
This Safety Head and Pins Assembly is used on standard Halocarbon and High Suction Pressure Ammonia Compressors. High
Suction Pressure Compressors are identified with an ‘X’ in the serial number. Also used in 2- Stage High Side Halo Compressors.
SECTION 100-R
PAGE 18
February 2001
Replaces
May 1985
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST
ITEM
118
217 & 218
306
315
315
401
Thru
404
401
Thru
408
409
413
Thru
420
501 thru
508
501
502
504, 507
& 508
511, 515 &
519
512
513 &
514
513 thru
518
DESCRIPTION
Valve, Internal Relief
Rotary Shaft Seal Assembly
Oil Pump Assembly
Recharge, Oil Filter (Gasket 1448B included)
(for use with 2046A & A35241A) (w/o bypass)
Recharge, Oil Filter (Gasket 1448B included)
(for use with A35240A & 1448J) (with bypass)
Cylinder Liner Assembly Kit
(for cylinder without unloading)
(for cylinder without unloading, Two-Stage)
Cylinder Liner Assembly Kit
(for cylinder with unloading)
(for cylinder with unloading, Two-Stage) **
Plate, Suction Plate
Capacity Control Assembly
Two Cylinder and Two-Stage Compressor **
4 thru 16 Cylinder Compressors
Piston, Rings and Connecting Rod Assembly Kit
2
1
1
1
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
4
6
8
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
16
1
1
1
PART
NUMBER
1721C
KT 509
A33480A
1
1
1
1
1
1
2115C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1448C
1
--
1
--
2
1
2
--
2
1
2
--
KT475
A35108D
1
-2
1
-4
2
1
6
2
-8
2
1
12
2
-16
KT476
A35108C
31909A
1
-1
-1
1
1
1
2
-1
2
1
1
2
-1
2
A41787AX
A41788BX
KT573
Piston Ring, Compression
Piston Ring, Oil
Bearing Half and Lock Nut Kit
6
2
2
12
4
4
18
6
6
24
8
8
36
12
12
48
16
16
31989M
31989N
KT575
Spring, Valve
24
48
72
96
144
192
33803A
Plate, Discharge Valve
2
4
6
8
12
16
35080SS
Safety Hd. & Pins Assy (Std. Ammonia)
Safety Hd. & Pins Assy (2- Stage High Side Comp.)
Safety Hd. & Pins Assy (#) (Halo)
Safety Hd. & Pins Assy (2- Stage High Side Comp.)
Booster- Safety Head- Ammonia
Booster- Safety Head- Halo
2- Stage Low Side-Safety Head- Ammonia
2- Stage Low Side- Safety Head- Halo
Gasket Kit, Complete
Gasket Kit, Complete
Gasket Kit, Complete
Gasket Kit, Complete
Gasket Kit, Complete
Gasket Kit, Complete
2
2
2
2
1
------
4
4
4
4
-1
-----
6
2
6
2
6
6
4
4
--1
----
8
8
8
8
---1
---
12
4
12
4
12
12
8
8
----1
--
16
16
16
16
-----1
A35082A
A35272A
A32695C
A32695D
A32695C
A32695D
KT041
KT043
KT045
KT049
KT051
KT055
------------NOTES:
A.
The above listing includes the minimum selection and quantity of recommended spare parts. All items listed do not necessarily apply
to every compressor, because of type, size or optional features. Items should be selected for each individual compressor as they
apply.
*
Patents Pending.
**
When capacity reduction is supplied.
#
This Safety Head and Pins Assembly is used on standard Halocarbon and High Suction Pressure Ammonia Compressors. High
Suction Pressure Compressors are identified with an ‘X’ in the serial number. Also used in 2- Stage High Side Halo Compressors.
February 2001
Replaces
April 1984
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 1
450 VMC COMPRESSORS
(High-Stage, Two-Stage, Booster and Heavy Duty)
REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
(NOTE: Parts applying only to certain models are indicated throughout the parts list.)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
18
19
REPLACEMENT PARTS ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS
BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration, 2 Cylinder (Figure 1)
Illustration, 4, 6 & 8 Cylinder (Figure 2)
Illustration, 12 & 16 Cylinder (Figure 3)
Parts List
DISCHARGE/SUCTION GAUGE
Illustration (Figure 4)
Parts List
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration (Figure 5)
Parts List
REAR BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration (Figure 6)
Parts List
CYLINDER LINER AND CAPACITY CONTROL REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration (Figure 7)
Parts List
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY AND SAFETY HEAD REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration (Figure 8)
Parts List
CAPACITY CONTROL MECHANISM REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration (Figure 9)
Parts List
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS
REPLACEMENT PARTS ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS
1.
Give the size and speed of the compressor, as well as serial number and refrigerant used. The serial
number is stamped on the nameplate and the compressor frame. The compressor frame serial number
location is directly above the suction flange on the frame of the compressor or directly above the rear bearing
cover. The rear bearing is located on the oil pump/filter end of the compressor.
2.
Always give the name of the part as well as the corresponding part number and/or item number. Also
include the number of parts required.
3.
Should there be a doubt regarding the part number or name, send a sketch of the part required or return the
old part as a sample, transportation charges prepaid. Orders on which part numbers and description do not
agree will be filled according to our best interpretation.
4.
If parts that appear on the parts list do not appear on the price list, it is because they are sold only as an
assembly. All prices shown on the list are F.O.B. factory. Minimum domestic parts order is $75.00 net price.
Prices are for a single item unless otherwise specified in the price list.
5.
Please indicate, on the order, preferred method of shipment. We will follow your instructions unless it is to
your best interest to change routing.
6.
If you purchased the compressor from a party other than Vilter Manufacturing Corporation, please state
when you purchased the compressor and from whom.
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
PRINTED IN U.S.A.
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 2
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450 VMC COMPRESSORS
(High-Stage, Two-Stage, Booster and Heavy Duty)
2 CYLINDER BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 1
February 2001
Replaces
April 1984
February 2001
Replaces
April 1984
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450 VMC COMPRESSORS
(High-Stage, Two-Stage, Booster and Heavy Duty)
4, 6 AND 8 CYLINDER BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 2
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 3
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 4
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450 VMC COMPRESSORS
(High-Stage, Two-Stage, Booster and Heavy Duty)
12 AND 16 CYLINDER BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 3
February 2001
Replaces
April 1984
February 2001
Replaces
April 1984
ITEM
101
102
102
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 5
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450 VMC COMPRESSORS
(High-Stage, Two-Stage, Booster and Heavy Duty)
BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
DESCRIPTION
Frame
5
Screw, /8” x 3½” Hex Head Cap
(Used with Water Jacket)
5
Screw, /8” x 2½” Hex Head Cap
(Used when Water Jacket not used)
Cover, Water Jacket (Ammonia and R22)
Gasket, Water Jacket (Ammonia and R22)
5
Stud, /8” x 3” (shown only on 2 Cylinder)
Stud, ¾” x 3¼” (not shown)
Stud, ¾” x 3¾”
5
Nut, /8” Hexagon (see Figure 1)
Nut, ¾” Hexagon (see Figure 1)
Tee, Suction 2½” x 2½” (see Figure 1)
Tee, Suction 3½”x3” (not shown)
Tee, Suction 5”x4” (not shown)
Tee, Suction 4”x4” (not shown) (High Stage)
Tee, Suction 4”x3” (not shown) (Booster)
Tee, Suction 5”x4” (not shown)
Elbow, Suction 4” (not shown)
Gasket, 4” Flange (Suction/Discharge Conn)
Gasket, 2½” Flange (Suction/Discharge Conn)
Gasket, 3½” Flange (Suction/Discharge Conn)
Gasket, 3” Flange (Suction/Discharge Conn)
Gasket, 5” Flange (Suction/Discharge Conn)
Ring, Male Joint 4” (Suction)
Suction Screen
Suction Screen
Suction Screen (Center)
Suction Screen (RH Side, 75% Cap Red)
Suction Screen
Suction Screen
Bag, Suction Screen (not shown)
Bag, Suction Screen (not shown)
Bag, Suction Screen (not shown)
Bag, Suction Screen (not shown)
Gasket, Suction Screen Cover
Gasket, Suction Screen Cover
Gasket, Suction Tee Cover
Gasket, Suction Tee Cover
Cover, Suction Screen
Cover, Suction Screen
Cover, Suction Tee (VPN 32417 & 36254C)
Cover, Suction Tee (VPN 36254)
5
Screw, /8” x 1½” Hex Head Cap
5
Screw, /8” x 1¾” Hex Head Cap
Screw, ½” x 1½” Hex Head Cap
Valve, ½” Oil Charge and Drain
Nipple, ½”x4” Sch. 80 Pipe
Gasket, Crankcase Oil Screen
Crankcase Oil Screen Assembly
Plug, ¾” Hex Head Pipe (not shown on 12)
Plug, ½” Hex Head Pipe (not shown on 2 thru 8)
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
2
4
6
8
12
16
1
1
1
1
1
1
20
40
60
80
120
160
PART
NUMBER
+
13152L
20
40
60
80
120
160
13152G
103
1
2
3
4
6
8
30299A
104
1
2
3
4
6
8
33329A
107 *
8
4
4
4
8
8
13156D
107 *
-4
4
4
--13157D
107 *
----8
8
13157F
107-A *
8
4
4
4
8
8
1726G
107-A *
-4
4
4
--1726H
108 *
1
-----A30319A
108 *
-1
----A32417B
108 †*
---1
--36254C
108 †*
--1
---A36254B
108 †*
--1
---A36254A
108 †*
---1
--A36254C
108 †*
--1
---12273C
108-A *
--2
2
--11323L
108-A *
1
2
----11323H
108-A *
-1
----11323K
108-A *
--3
---11323J
108-A *
----1
1
11323M
108-B *
--1
---13151L
109 †
1
-2
2
--A32428D
109
-1
----A32428A
109 †
---1
--A32428C
109†
---1
--A32428D
109 †
--1
1
--A35215A
109
----2
2
A32565A
109-A *
-1
----A33474A
109-A †*
1
-2
3
--A33474B
109-A *
----2
2
A33474G
109-A †*
--1
1
--A35234A
110
1
-2
2
--31892A
110
----2
2
33493A
110 †
-1
-1
--11323J
110 †
--1
1
--35217A
111
1
-2
2
--31893A
111
----2
2
33492A
111 †
-1
-1
--13706A
111 †
--1
1
--35216A
112
-5
-5
--13152C
112
--6
6
--13152D
112
6
-12
12
16
16
2796E
113
1
1
1
1
1
1
A15375A
113-A
1
1
1
1
1
1
13189G
114
1
1
1
1
1
1
31889A
115
1
1
1
1
1
1
A31886A
116
1
1
1
1
1
1
13264E
116
1
1
1
1
1
1
13264D
NOTES:
*
May not be shown, or only shown typically on one illustration.
+
Part Number on application
†
6 Cylinder Compressors with serial numbers below 45461 (oil unloading) and 60019 (gas unloading) are equipped with a suction
elbow and two suction screens (VPN A32428B) located behind the suction screen covers on the frame. 6 Cylinder compressors
with serial numbers 45461 (oil unloading) and 60019 (gas unloading) and above are equipped with a suction tee (VPN 36254) and a
single suction screen (VPN A35215A) located in the suction tee. 8 Cylinder compressors with serial numbers below 45461 (oil
unloading) and 60019 (gas unloading) are equipped with a suction tee (VPN 36254C) and three suction screens, one in the tee and
two behind the suction screen covers on the frame. 8 Cylinder compressors with serial numbers 45461 (oil unloading) and 60019
(gas unloading) and above are equipped with suction tee (VPN 36254) and a single suction screen (VPN A35215A) located in the
suction tee.
††
Part Number on application.
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 6
February 2001
Replaces
April 1984
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450 VMC COMPRESSORS
(High-Stage, Two-Stage, Booster and Heavy Duty)
BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
ITEM
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
DESCRIPTION
Pin Assembly, Crankcase Oil Screen Retaining
Safety Valve (Internal Relief)
Gasket, 2” Flange
Cover, Safety Valve
5
Screw, /8” x 2” Hex Head Cap
Gasket, Handhole Cover
Handhole Cover and Sight Glass Assy (Std Conn)
Glass, Oil Sight – 2”
Screw, ½” x 1½” Hex Head Cap
Tube, Oil Feed Connector
Spring
2
1
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
16
---
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
4
6
8
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
4
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
16
16
16
32
---1
---1
16
1
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
32
1
1
PART
NUMBER
A31936A
1721B
11323G
31954A
13152E
31894A
A33034L
1484A
2796E
33494A
31789A
February 2001
Original Issue
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450 VMC COMPRESSORS
(High-Stage, Two-Stage, Booster and Heavy Duty)
DISCHARGE / SUCTION GAUGE REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 4
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 7
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 8
February 2001
Original Issue
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450XL® * VMC COMPRESSORS
DISCHARGE / SUCTION GAUGE REPLACEMENT PARTS
ITEM
128
128
129
129
130
131
133
134
DESCRIPTION
Heater, Electric Crankcase Oil, 115V (not shown)
Heater, Electric Crankcase Oil, 230V (not shown)
Gauge, Discharge, 300 PSI
Gauge, Suction, 150 PSI
Stedy-Mount®
Connector, ¼” MPT x ¼” O.D. Compression
Nipple ¼” x 4” Sch. 80 Pipe
Thermometer, Crankcase Oil (not shown)
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
4
6
8
12
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
16
2
2
2
1
3
3
3
1
PART
NUMBER
2069J
2069K
1204E
1204C
A17311SS
13229D
13181G
1467F
February 2001
Replaces
April 1984
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450 VMC COMPRESSORS
(High-Stage, Two-Stage, Booster and Heavy Duty)
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 5
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 9
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 10
February 2001
Replaces
April 1984
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450 VMC COMPRESSORS
(High-Stage, Two-Stage, Booster and Heavy Duty)
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
ITEM
201 thru
211A
201 thru
233
DESCRIPTION
Front Bearing Cover & Relief Valve Assy
Front Bearing Cover & Relief Valve Assy
Complete Crankshaft Sub-Assembly Kit
Complete Crankshaft Sub-Assembly Kit
Complete Crankshaft Sub-Assembly Kit
Complete Crankshaft Sub-Assembly Kit
Complete Crankshaft Sub-Assembly Kit (HD)
Complete Crankshaft Sub-Assembly Kit
201 thru
Complete Crankshaft Sub-Assy Kit (Hi-Stage HD)
244 less * Complete Crankshaft Sub-Assy Kit (Booster)
201
Cap, Valve
202
Gasket, Durabla
203
Nut, Packing
204
Washers
7
39
3
205
Packing, /8” O.D. x /64” I.D. x /8”
206
Stem, Valve
207
Spring
5
208
Ball, /8” dia. Steel
209 thru
Front Bearing Cover Assembly
211A
Front Bearing Cover Assembly
209
Plug, ¼” Hex Head Pipe
3
210
Plug, /8” Hex Head Pipe
211
Cover, Front Bearing
211A +
Orifice, Oil Metering
211B
Shield, Splash
3
211C
Screw, Round Head, No. 10-32 x /8” long
212
Gasket, Bearing Cover
5
213
Screw, /8” x 4” Hex Socket Head Cap
214+
Retainer, Front Bearing (with Oil Hole)
214+
Retainer, Front Bearing (with Oil Hole)
5
215
Screw, /8” x 2” Hex Head Cap
216
Screw, ½” x 4” Hex Head Cap
217
Seal, Rotary Shaft Assembly
217
Seal, Rotary Shaft Assembly
218
Gasket, Shaft Seal Cover
218
Gasket, Shaft Seal Cover
219
Screw, ½” x 1¾” Hex Head Cap
220 & 220A Cover, Shaft Seal, Small
220 & 220A Cover, Shaft Seal, Large
220A
Drain Tube
224
Crankshaft and Bearings Assembly
Thru
Crankshaft and Bearings Assembly
233
Crankshaft and Bearings Assembly
Crankshaft and Bearings Assembly
Crankshaft and Bearings Assembly (HD)
Crankshaft and Bearings Assembly Kit
Crankshaft and Bearings Assy Kit (High Stage HD)
Crankshaft and Bearings Assy Kit (Booster)
224
Locknut and Retaining Compound Kit
224
Locknut and Retaining Compound Kit
227
Front Bearing and Retaining Compound Kit
227
Front Bearing and Retaining Compound Kit
228
Ring, Front Bearing Retainer
228
Ring, Front Bearing Retainer
228
Ring, Front Bearing Retainer
NOTES:
* Less items 234, 235, 236, 239 and 241.
+ See note with same symbol on Page 9.
2
1
-1
-------1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
-1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
-6
3
1
-1
-8
1
-1
1
-------1
-1
-1
---
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
4
6
8
12
1
----1
1
1
----1
----1
----1
---1
----1
--------1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
----1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
----1
1
1
6
6
6
6
3
3
3
3
1
----1
1
1
1
----1
1
1
8
8
8
8
1
----1
1
1
1
1
1
1
----1
----1
----1
---1
----1
--------1
----1
1
1
1
----1
1
1
1
----1
-1
--1
--
16
-1
------1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
-1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
-1
6
3
-1
-1
8
-1
1
------1
1
-1
-1
--1
PART
NUMBER
A31121A
A32566A
KT445
KT446
KT447
KT448
KT553
KT449
KT554
KT555
17355A
30651C
31048A
31048D
31048E
31048C
31048F
13155K
A36240A
A36241A
13264B
13264C
Order Assy.
33361A +
35274A
1332C
31890A
13159E
31885A +
33500A +
13152E
2796EV
A33483A
A33489A
31897A
33496A
2796EL
31044A
A32564A
35078A
A34554A
A34554B
A34555A
A34555B
A34555BX
KT556
KT557
KT558
KT366
KT367
KT368
KT369
33144A
33145A
34564A
February 2001
Replaces
April 1984
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 11
450 VMC COMPRESSORS
(High-Stage, Two-Stage, Booster and Heavy Duty)
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
2
1
-------5
1
1
1
1
4
1
------------1
-1
-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
4
6
8
12
----1
----1
----1
---1
----1
--------5
5
5
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
---1
---2
---4
---2
---2
---2
---1
---1
---4
---4
---1
---8
1
----1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
16
------1
1
8
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
2
4
2
2
2
1
1
4
4
1
8
-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART
NUMBER
KT377
KT378
KT379
KT380
KT559
KT381
KT560
KT561
13163A
31904A
KT353
33678A
A33509A
1736G
33403A
*
13162X *
2796EL
33508A
33508B
33498A †
33497A
*
13165F
1726E
13253F
2796AC †
31994B
33505B
31956A
33495A
1204E
A17311SS
A11392A
13181M
13229D
1098B
13181C
229
Crankshaft & Retaining Compound Kit
229
Crankshaft & Retaining Compound Kit
229
Crankshaft & Retaining Compound Kit
229
Crankshaft & Retaining Compound Kit
229
Crankshaft & Retaining Compound Kit (HD)
229
Crankshaft & Retaining Compound Kit
229
Crankshaft & Retaining Compound Kit (H/S HD)
229
Crankshaft & Retaining Compound Kit (Booster)
1
229-A
Plug, Pipe, /8”, Hex Socket Head (not shown)
231
Retainer, Rear Bearing
231A&231B Rear Bearing and Lock Pin Kit
231-A
Pin, Bearing Lock
231-B
Bearing, Rear
5
232
Screw, /16” x 1½” Hex Head Cap
233
Crank, Oil Pump Drive
234
Cap, Bearing Support
235
Pin, ¼” x 1” Dowel
236
Bolt, ½” x 1¾” Machine
237
Bearing, Upper Right Half or Lower Left Half
238
Bearing, Upper Left Half or Lower Right Half
239 †
Dam, Center Bearing Oil
240
Pin, Threaded Taper
241
Case, Bearing Support
242
Washer, ½” Spring Lock
243
Nut, ½” Hex
9
244
Nut, /16” Hex
245†
Screw, ¼” x ½” Hex Head Cap
246
Key, Crankshaft
246
Key, Crankshaft
247
Screw, Flywheel Hub
248
Washer, Flywheel Hub Screw
249
Gauge, Oil Pressure, 300 PSI
®
250
Stedy-Mount
251
Valve, ¼” Screw End Globe
252
Nipple, ¼” x 7” Sch. 80 Pipe
253
Connector, ¼” MPT x ¼” O.D. Compression
254
Tee, ¼”
255
Nipple, ¼” x 2” Sch. 80 Pipe
NOTES:
*
Matched set with pins, sold as assembly A32163A. Shown in three parts to illustrate disassembly.
+
See Page 8 for symbol regarding this information. Compressors below serial number 45330 were furnished with the no longer
available front bearing cover assemblies A30294A (2 and 4 cylinders) or A32162A (6,8 and 12 cylinders), and front bearing retainer
31885A (2 and 4 cylinders) or 33500A (6, 8 and 12 cylinders) without oil hole. Former front bearing retainers (31885A or 33500A)
without oil holes cannot be used with current front bearing cover assemblies A36240A (2 and 4 cylinders) and A36241A (6, 8 and 12
cylinders), as there is no way for oil to get to the bearing. If front bearing cover is being replaced, a current front bearing retainer
(31885A or 33500A with oil hole) must be ordered also, unless one of these current styles is already being used. If a current front
bearing retainer, (31885A or 33500A, both with oil hole) is used with former style cover (A30294A or A32162A) having an oil hole,
remove orifice in cover (A30294A or A32162A) and replace with solid 1/8” pipe plug.
†
Dams (Item 239) and screws (Item 245) are not needed when using VILTER’s patented joined crankshafts. In this design version
(introduced in 1980), two 6 cylinder or two 8 cylinder crankshafts are joined by a sleeve to form an inseparable 12 cylinder or 16
cylinder crankshaft. This specially machined sleeve eliminates the dams. This design is completely interchangeable with the former
design.
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 12
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450 VMC COMPRESSORS
(High-Stage, Two-Stage, Booster and Heavy Duty)
REAR BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 6
February 2001
Replaces
April 1984
February 2001
Replaces
March 1984
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 13
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450 VMC COMPRESSORS
(High-Stage, Two-Stage, Booster and Heavy Duty)
REAR BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
ITEM
301 thru 304
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
310 *
311
311A,312,
313 & 314
311A,312
Thru 314 &
315A thru
319
311A *
312
313
314
315
315A *
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
324 *
325
326
327
328 **
329 **
330
331
332
332A **
333
334
335
DESCRIPTION
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
4
6
8
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART
NUMBER
KT092
Order Kit
13163E
2868H
33361A
31899A
A33480A
31900A
33320A
34565A
A35241A
A35240A
2046A
1448U
Rear Bearing Cover Assembly Kit
Cover, Rear Bearing
Plug, ¾” Hex Socket Head Pipe
3
Pin, /8” x 1” Dowel (not shown)
Orifice, Oil Metering (not shown)
Gasket, Oil Pump Body
Oil Pump Assembly
Gasket, Oil Pump Cover
Gasket, Oil Pump and Rear Bearing Cover Seal
Cover, Oil Pump and Filter Head
Filter Assy., Complete (without Bypass Relief)
Filter Assy., Complete (with Bypass Relief)
Spool Assembly (without Bypass Relief)
Spool – Strainer Tube Assembly
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Filter Assembly (without Shell)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1448T
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
AR
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
10
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
AR
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
10
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
AR
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
10
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
AR
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
10
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
AR
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
10
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
AR
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
10
8
1448J
1448H
1448K
1448L
2115C
1448C
1448M
1448N
1448P
1448Q
1190A
1448B
A34623A
1689G
40680AJ
40680AT
2047A
1892B
S1589A
13239C **
13229D **
2030A
35106A
13375D
1643V **
31890A
13152E
2796EL
Spool Assembly (with Bypass Relief) (used on 1448C)
Seal, Spool End
Strainer Tube
Ring, Retaining
Recharge (for use with 2046A and A35241A) †
Recharge (for use with A35240A and 1448J) †
Pressure Plate Assembly
Pressure Plate
‘O’ Ring Seal, Pressure Plate
Spring, Pressure Plate
1
Plug, Steel Square Head Pipe /8”
Gasket, Oil Filter Head
Filter Shell with Bolt Ring
7
Screw, Hex Head Cap /16” x 2”
Instruction/Nameplate (for use with A35241A)
Instruction/Nameplate (for use with A35240A)
Gauge, 2½”, 0-300 PSI, Oil filter
Elbow, ¼” 90° Female Compression
Tubing, ¼” O.D. Steel (“AR” = As Required)
Tee, ¼” Compression
Connector, ¼” MPT x ¼” O.D. Compression
Valve, 3-Way, Oil Filter
Bracket, Valve
Elbow, ¼” 90° Male Compression
Control, Pressure Differential
Gasket, Bearing Cover
5
Screw, /8” x 2” Hex Head Cap
Screw, ½” x 1¾” Hex Head Cap
NOTES:
*
Filter with bypass relief is standard beginning with S/N 45497 (oil unloaded) and 60080 (gas unloaded).
**
Used when center tube (Spool Assembly, Item 311) without bypass relief is used.
†
Replacement recharge also includes gasket 1448B (Item 321).
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 14
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450 VMC COMPRESSORS
(High-Stage, Two-Stage, Booster and Heavy Duty)
CYLINDER LINER AND CAPACITY CONTROL REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 7
February 2001
Replaces
March 1984
February 2001
Replaces
March 1985
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 15
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450 VMC COMPRESSORS
(High-Stage, Two-Stage, Booster and Heavy Duty)
CYLINDER LINER AND CAPACITY CONTROL REPLACEMENT PARTS
(For All Serial Numbers Unless Otherwise Noted)
ITEM
401, 402
& 403
401, 402
Thru 408
401A, 402,
403 & 408A
401A, 402
Thru 408A
401
401A
402
403
405
406
407
408
408A +
409
410A
411A & 412
410
411 & 412
410
410A
410B
411/411A
412
413
Thru
420
DESCRIPTION
Cylinder Liner Assembly (High-Stage)
(for cylinder without unloading)
Cylinder Liner Assembly (High-Stage)
(for cylinder with unloading)
Cylinder Liner Assembly (Two-Stage)
(for cylinder without unloading)
Cylinder Liner Assembly (Two-Stage)
(for cylinder with unloading)
Liner, Cylinder (High-Stage)
Liner, Cylinder (Two-Stage)
Seal, ‘O’ Ring (upper High Stage & Two-Stage)
Pin, Roll, 0.125” dia. X 1½” lg.
Ring, Lift
Spring, Lift
Pin, Lift
Retainer, Lift Ring
Seal, ‘O’ Ring (lower – Two-Stage only)
Plate, Suction Valve
Piston Kit, Cap Red (Oil Actuated †)
Serial Number 45,000 thru 45,999++
Piston Kit, Cap Red (Gas Actuated†)
Serial Numbers 60,000 thru 61,199++
Piston Ring (Steel – For Gas Actuated)
‘O’ Ring (Rubber – for 0.187” Groove)
Ring Set (PTFE – for 0.120” Groove)
Piston, Unloader (Gas or Oil)
Pin, Long Pivot
Complete Capacity Control Mechanism Assembly
Serial No. 45,000-45,999 & 60,000-61,199++
(2 Cylinder and Two-Stage)
(High-Stage)
Arm, Yoke Lifting
Yoke Assembly (2 Cylinder and Two-Stage)
Yoke Assembly (High-Stage)
3
11
Pin, /8” x /16” lg. Roll
Pin, Short Pivot
Spring, Unloader Yoke
Yoke Guide Assy (2 Cylinder and Two-Stage)
Yoke Guide Assy (High-Stage)
3
Screw, /8” x 1” Cap Lock
Spacer, Sleeve
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
2
4
6
8
12
16
PART
NUMBER
2(1*)
2
2
4
4
8
KT475
-(1*)
2
4
4
8
8
KT476
--
--
2(3*)
--
4(6*)
--
A35108D
-2
-2
8
-(1*)
-(8*)
-(8*)
-(1*)
-2
-4
-4
16
2
16
16
2
-4
4(3*)
6
6
6
24
4(3*)
32(24*)
32(24*)
4(3*)
6
6
-8
-8
32
4
32
32
4
-8
8(6*)
12
12
12
48
8(6*)
64(48*)
64(48*)
8(6*)
12
12
-16
-16
64
8
64
64
8
-16
A35108C
34510A
34710A
2176BH
1193Q
35071A
35069A
35070A
1971A
2176BL
31909A
-(1*)
1
2(3*)
2
4(6*)
4
KT364
-(1*)
-(4*)
-(1*)
-(1*)
-(1*)
-(1*)
1
4
1
1
1
1
2(3*)
8(12*)
2(3*)
2(3*)
2(3*)
2(3*)
2
8
2
2
2
2
4(6*)
16(24*)
4(6*)
4(6*)
4(6*)
4(6*)
4
16
4
4
4
4
KT034
31989L
2176AX
2557A
Order Kit
33250C
-(1*)
--(1*)
-(1*)
--(1*)
-(1*)
-(4*)
-(1*)
--(2*)
-(2*)
-1
1
-1
1
1
4
-1
---
-(3*)
2
2(3*)
-(3*)
2
2(3*)
2(3*)
8(12*)
-(3*)
2
-(6*)
-(6*)
-2
2
-2
2
2
8
-2
---
-(6*)
4
4(6*)
-(6*)
4
4(6*)
4(6*)
16(24*)
-(6*)
4
-(12*)
-(12*)
-4
4
-4
4
4
16
-4
---
A33577A
A33354A
33338A
A33575A
A33335A
1193X
33250B
33686A
A33576A
A33347A
1352D
33618A
413
414
414
415
416
417
418
418
419
420
NOTES:
*
Except for 2 cylinder and Two-Stage machines, parts quantities are listed for standard unloading only. The 2 cylinder and TwoStage quantities are listed in parentheses ( ) for the 50% option. Standard unloading on compressors with 2 cylinders is none; 4
cylinders is 50%; 6 cylinders is 33 and 66%; 8 cylinders is 25 and 50%; 12 cylinders is 33 and 66%; 16 cylinders is 25 and 50%; and
Two-Stage is none. See Operation Section for unloading options. Also, for single cylinder unloading, the yoke assembly (Item 414)
and two pins on the yoke guide assembly (Item 418) have drilled and tapped holes to accommodate screws (Item 419) and spacers
(Item 420).
†
Actuation type can be determined by checking the unloading solenoid valve – gas uses two-way valves, oil uses three-way valves.
For oil unloaded compressors: In serial number range 45,000 thru 45,858, the design version of “unloader piston with one Rubber
Ring in a 0.187 in. Groove” was used. In serial number range 45,859 thru 45,999, a “PTFE/Rubber Ring Set in a 0.120 in. Groove”
was used. Pistons are interchangeable, but the rings are not.
+
This lower ‘O’ Ring Seal is for Two-Stage Compressors only. Some initial design High-Stage Compressors also had a similar seal.
Its use on the High-Stage machine was discontinued because it is not really needed. It is no longer available. Do not order the
Two-Stage Seal for use on these older High-Stage machines. It will not fit.
++
For serial numbers above these ranges, see Page 17.
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 16
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450 VMC COMPRESSORS
(High-Stage, Two-Stage, Booster and Heavy Duty)
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
AND SAFETY HEAD REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 8
February 2001
Replaces
March 1985
February 2001
Replaces
March 1985
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 17
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450 VMC COMPRESSORS
(High-Stage, Two-Stage, Booster and Heavy Duty)
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
AND SAFETY HEAD REPLACEMENT PARTS
ITEM
501 Thru
506
501
Thru
512
501
502
504
505 and
506
507
Thru
512
507
508
509
510
511
+512
512
DESCRIPTION
Piston, Rings and Pin Assembly Kit
Piston, Rings and Connecting Rod Assy Kit
(All Compressors except 16 Cyl. High-Stage)
Piston, Rings and Connecting Rod Assy Kit
(Heavy Duty High-Stage #)
Piston Ring, Compression
Piston Ring, Oil
Retaining Ring, Wrist Pin
Piston and Wrist Pin Assembly (matched)
Connecting Rod Assembly with Bearings Kit
(All Compressors except 16 Cyl. High-Stage)
Connecting Rod Assembly with Bearings Kit
(Heavy Duty High-Stage #)
Bushing, Wrist Pin
3
Lock Nut, /8”, Connecting Rod
3
Nut, Plain Hex /8”-UNF
Bolt, Connecting Rod
Connecting Rod and Cap
Bearing Half, Connecting Rod (All Compressors Except 16 Cylinder High-Stage)
Standard Size
0.015” Undersize
0.030” Undersize
Bearing Half, Connecting Rod (Heavy Duty
High-Stage #)
Spring, Safety Head
Safety Head and Pins Assembly (Standard Comp)
Safety Head and Pins Assembly (Hi Suction Comp #)
11
Pin, Roll, 0.187” dia. x /16” lg. †
Safety Head Yoke Kit (includes 4 of item 514)
Spring, Valve
Plate, Discharge Valve
Safety Head
Spring, Valve
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
2
4
6
8
12
16
2
4
6
8
12
16
PART
NUMBER
KT213
2
4
6
8
12
16
KT478
-6
2
4
2
-12
4
8
4
-18
6
12
6
8
24
8
16
8
-36
12
24
12
16
48
16
32
16
KT478A
31989M
31989N
33244A
***
2
4
6
8
12
16
KT463
-2
4
4
4
2
-4
8
8
8
4
-6
12
12
12
6
9
8
16
16
16
8
-12
24
24
24
12
16
16
32
32
32
16
KT463A
31896B *
2028A
2027A
31955A
**
2
2
2
4
4
4
6
6
6
8
8
8
12
12
12
16
16
16
KT512
KT513A
KT513
---8
-32
35273ST
513
2
4
6
8
12
16
35252A
514
2
4
6
8
12
16
A35082A
and 518
2
4
6
8
12
16
A35272A
514
8
16
24
32
48
64
1712F
515
2
4
6
8
12
16
KT543
516
16
32
48
64
96
128
33803A
517
2
4
6
8
12
16
35080SS
518
2
4
6
8
12
16
**
519
8
16
24
32
48
64
33803A
NOTES:
A.
Early 450 compressors were equipped with pistons having 2 compression rings and 2 oil control rings.
*
Replacement wrist pin bushing must be reamed after installation to properly accommodate wrist pin. See Service Instructions for
additional details.
**
Shown for disassembly purposes only. Order appropriate Kit or Assembly.
***
Piston Assembly with three compression rings and one oil ring is standard beginning with serial number 45664 (oil unloading) and
60433 (gas unloading). It is a direct replacement for former piston assembly (two compression rings and two oil rings with
expander). Piston ring part numbers are the same for either assembly. Current assembly is interchangeable with and can be mixed
with former piston assemblies within a compressor. Do not use expanders in either assembly – they are no longer needed.
†
Install with pin’s outside longitudinal seam facing outside diameter of safety head.
#
High Suction Pressure Compressors are identified by an ‘X’ in the serial number. Heavy Duty Compressors are identified by ‘HD’ in
the serial number.
+
Do not use undersize bearing halves on 6, 8 and 12 Cylinder Belt Driven High-Stage compressors. Bearing half sets with quantities
enough for one connecting rod are also available. For sets without Lock Nuts, order 35086ST, 41726ST, 35214ST or 35273ST.
For sets with Lock Nuts, order KT512, KT513 or KT513A.
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 18
February 2001
Replaces
April 1984
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450 VMC COMPRESSORS
CAPACITY CONTROL MECHANISM (+) REPLACEMENT PARTS
Version used beginning with Serial Number:
61,200 for Gas Unloading.
46,000 for Oil Unloading (++)
FIGURE 9
ITEM
410 & 411
410
411
413
Thru
420
413
414
414
415
416
417
418
418
419
420
NOTES:
*, †, +, ++ +
DESCRIPTION
Piston & Rings Assy, Cap Red (Gas or Oil†)
Ring Set (PTFE & rubber)
Piston, Unloader (Gas or Oil)
Complete Capacity Control Mechanism Assembly
(2 Cylinder and Two-Stage only)
Complete Capacity Control Mechanism Assembly
Arm, Yoke Lifting
Yoke Assembly (2 Cylinder and Two-Stage only)
Yoke Assembly
3
11
Pin, /8” x /16” lg. Roll
Pin, Short Pivot
Spring, Unloader Yoke
Yoke Guide Assy (2 Cylinder and Two-Stage only)
Yoke Guide Assembly
3
Screw, /8” x 1” Cap Lock
Spacer, Sleeve
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR **
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
2
4
6
8
12
16
-(1*)
1
2(3*)
2
4(6*)
4
-(1*)
1
2(3*)
2
4(6*)
4
-(1*)
1
2(3*)
2
4(6*)
4
PART
NUMBER
A35315CX
2557A
Order Assy
-(1*)
--(1*)
-(1*)
--(1*)
-(1*)
-(4*)
-(1*)
--(2*)
-(2*)
A41787AX
A41788BX
41725A
A33575A
A33335A
1193X
33250B
33686A
A33576A
A33347A
1352D
33618A
-1
1
-1
1
1
4
-1
---
See Pages 12 and 13 for notes and lower serial number applications.
-(3*)
2
2(3*)
-(3*)
2
2(3*)
2(3*)
8(12*)
-(3*)
2
-(6*)
-(6*)
-2
2
-2
2
2
8
-2
---
-(6*)
4
4(6*)
-(6*)
4
4(6*)
4(6*)
16(24*)
-(6*)
4
-(12*)
-(12*)
-4
4
-4
4
4
16
-4
---
February 2001
Replaces
March 1985
SECTION 102-R
PAGE 19
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
450 VMC COMPRESSORS
(High-Stage, Two-Stage, Booster and Heavy Duty)
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST
ITEM
------------118
217
217
306
315
315
401
Thru
404
401
Thru
408
409
413
Thru
420
501
Thru
512
501
502
508
512
DESCRIPTION
Gasket Kit, Complete
Gasket Kit, Complete
Gasket Kit, Complete
Gasket Kit, Complete
Gasket Kit, Complete
Gasket Kit, Complete
Safety Valve (Internal Relief)
Rotary Shaft Seal Assembly
Rotary Shaft Seal Assembly
Oil Pump Assembly
Recharge, Oil Filter (Gasket 1448B included)
(For use with 2046A and A35241A)
Recharge, Oil Filter (Gasket 14483 included)
(For use with A35240A and 1448J)
Cylinder Liner Assembly Kit
(for cylinder without unloading, High-Stage)
(for cylinder without unloading, Two-Stage)
Cylinder Liner Assembly Kit
(for cylinder with unloading, High-Stage)
(for cylinder with unloading, Two-Stage) *
Plate, Suction Valve
Capacity Control Assembly
Two Cylinder and Two-Stage Compressor *
4 thru 16 Cylinder Compressors
Piston, Rings and Connecting Rod Assembly Kit
(All Compressors except 16 Cyl. High-Stage)
Piston, Rings and Connecting Rod Assembly Kit
(Heavy Duty High-Stage #)
Piston Ring, Compression
Piston Ring, Oil
3
Lock Nut, /8”, Connecting Rod
Bearing Half, Connecting Rod
(All Compressors except 16 Cyl. High-Stage)
2
1
-----1
1
-1
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
4
6
8
12
----1
----1
----1
----1
----1
1
1
1
1
----1
1
1
1
1
1
1
16
-----1
1
-1
1
PART
NUMBER
KT041
KT043
KT045
KT049
KT051
KT055
1721B
A33483A
A33489A
A33480A
1
1
1
1
1
1
2115C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1448C
1
--
1
--
2
1
2
--
2
1
2
--
KT475
A35108D
1
-2
1
-4
2
1
6
2
-8
2
1
12
2
-16
KT476
A35108C
31909A
1
--
-1
1
1
-1
1
1
-1
A33577A
A33354A
1
1
2
2
2
2
KT478
-6
2
8
-12
4
16
-18
6
24
2
24
8
32
-36
12
48
2
48
16
64
KT478A
31989M
31989N
2028A
2
4
6
8
12
16
35086ST or
KT512
35273ST
33803A
512
Bearing Half, Conn. Rod (Heavy Duty High-Stage #)
---8
-16
516 &
Spring, Valve
24
48
72
96
144
192
519
517
Plate, Discharge Valve
2
4
6
8
12
16
35080SS
514 &
Safety Head and Pins Assembly (Standard Comp)
1
2
2
2
2
2
A35082A
518
Safety Head and Pins Assembly (Hi-Suct Comp #)
1
2
2
2
2
2
A35272A
NOTES:
A.
The above listing includes the minimum selection and quantity of recommended spare parts. All items listed do not necessary apply
to every compressor, because of type, size or optional features. Items should be selected for each individual compressor as they
apply.
*
When supplied, capacity reduction is optional,
#
High Suction Pressure Compressors are identified by an ‘X’ in the serial number. Heavy Duty Compressors are identified by ‘HD’ in
the serial number.
February 2001
Replaces
March 1975
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 1
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1A
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
19
20
21
24
25
26
28
29
31
32
32
33
REPLACEMENT PARTS ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS
BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration, 2 Cylinder (Figure 1)
Illustration, 4, 6 & 8 Cylinder (Figure 2)
Illustration, 12 & 16 Cylinder (Figure 3)
Parts List
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration, 2 thru 8 Cylinder (Figure 4)
Illustration, 12 and 16 Cylinder (Figure 5)
Parts List
REAR BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
®
Illustration, with Standard Tri-Micro Filter Option (Figure 6)
Parts List
®
Illustration, with Tri-Micro Filter Option (Figure 7)
Parts List
CYLINDER LINER AND CAPACITY CONTROL REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration (Figure 8)
Parts List
CAPACITY CONTROL MECHANISM ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration (Figure 9)
Parts List
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY AND SAFETY HEAD REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration (Figure 10)
Parts List
MODERNIZING 1200 RPM COMPRESSORS
CYLINDER LINER & CAPACITY CONTROL REPLACEMENT PARTS (SERIAL NUMBERS BELOW 3638)
Illustration (Figure 11)
Parts List
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD REPLACEMENT PARTS (SERIAL NUMBERS BELOW 3638)
Illustration (Figure 12)
Parts List
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS (SERIAL NUMBERS BELOW 9999)
Parts List
HEAVY DUTY V-BELT DRIVEN REPLACEMENT PARTS
Parts List
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
PRINTED IN U.S.A.
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 1A
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
February 2001
Replaces
March 1975
REPLACEMENT PARTS ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS
1.
Give the size and speed of the compressor, as well as serial number and refrigerant used.
When recording serial number, be certain to include letters (i.e. A, AH, R22S, R12H, etc.) which
precedes the actual serial number. This will establish whether the compressor is built for 1000
RPM or 1200 RPM.
The serial number is stamped on the nameplate and the compressor frame. On 2 cylinder
compressors, the frame serial number location is directly below the cylinder cover on the
crankcase handhole side. On 4 thru 16 cylinder compressors, the frame serial number location
is directly above the suction flange or directly above the rear bearing cover. The rear bearing is
located on the oil pump/filter end of the compressor.
2.
Always give the name of the part as well as the corresponding part number and/or item number.
Also include the number of parts required.
3.
Should there be a doubt regarding the part number or name, send a sketch of the part required,
or return the old part as a sample, transportation charges prepaid. Orders on which part
numbers and description do not agree will be filled according to our best interpretation.
4.
If parts that appear on the parts list do not appear on the price list, it is because they are sold
only as an assembly. All prices shown on the list are F.O.B. factory. Minimum domestic parts
order is $75.00 net price. Prices are for a single item unless otherwise specified in the price list.
5.
Please indicate on the order the preferred method of shipment. We will follow your instructions
unless it is to your best interest to change routing.
6.
If you purchased the compressor from a party other than Vilter Manufacturing Corporation,
please state when you purchased the compressor and from whom.
FEBRUARY 2001
Replaces
March 1975
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
FOR 2 CYLINDER VMC COMPRESSORS
FIGURE 1
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 2
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 3
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS FOR
4, 6 & 8 CYLINDER VMC COMPRESSORS
FIGURE 2
February 2001
Replaces
March 1969
February 2001
Replaces
March 1969
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS FOR
12 & 16 CYLINDER VMC COMPRESSORS
FIGURE 3
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 4
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 5
November 2001
Replaces
February 2001
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS FOR ALL VMC COMPRESSORS
NO. REQ. PER COMPRESSOR
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
NO. OF CYL.
101
102
2
4
SINGLE STAGE
6
8
12
16
SERIAL NO.
TWOSTAGE
6
12
FROM
THRU
PART
NUMBER
Frame
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
----*
5
Screw, /8” x 3½”Hex Head Cap
(Used with Water Jacket)
20
40
60
80
120 160
20
40
0
Present
13152L
5
102 Screw, /8” x 2½” Hex Head Cap
(Used without Water Jacket)
20
40
60
80
120 160
40
80
0
Present
13152G
103 Cover, Water Jacket (Amm & R22)
1
2
3
4
6
8
1
2
0
Present
30299A
104 Gasket, Water Jacket (Amm & R22)
1
2
3
4
6
8
1
2
0
Present
33329A
105 Cover, Cylinder **
Without Capacity Reduction
-1
-2
-4
--0
Present
A30332A
With Capacity Reduction, Oil Type
1†
-2†
-4†
--0
Present
30332B
With Capacity Reduction, Gas Type
-1
-2
-4
--0
Present
30332G
Without Capacity Reduction
1
-1
-2
-3
6
0
Present
A30364A
With Capacity Reduction, Oil Type
1†
-2†
-4†
-2†
6†
0
Present
30364B
With Capacity Reduction, Gas Type
1†
-2
-4
---0
Present
30364G
With Capacity Reduction, Two-Stage
------1†
-0
Present
30364F
106 Gasket, Cylinder Cover
1
2
3
4
6
8
3
6
0
Present
33330A
5
107 Stud, /8” x 3” (shown only on 2 cyl.)
8
4
4
4
8
8
4
8
0
Present
13156D
107 Stud, ¾” x 3¼” (not shown)
-4
4
4
--4
-0
Present
13157D
108 Tee, Suction
2½ “ x 2½” (all)
1
-------0
Present
30319A
3½” x 2½” (Ammonia)
-1
------0
Present
32417C
3½” x 3” (Halocarbon)
-1
------0
Present
32417B
3” x 4” (Amm & Boosters)
--1
---1
-***
***
36254A
4” x 4” (Halocarbon)
--1
-----***
***
36254B
4” x 4” (Amm & Boosters)
---1
----***
***
36254B
5” x 4” (Halocarbon)
---1
----***
***
36254C
Elbow, Suction
4” x 3” (Amm & Boosters)
--1
---1
-0
***
32418A
4” x 4” (Halocarbon)
--1
-----0
***
12273C
109 Screen, Suction (Right & Left Side)
1
-2
2
--2
-0
***
A32428D
Screen, Suction
-1
------0
Present
A32428A
Screen, Suction (Center)
---1
----0
***
A32428C
Screen, Suction
----2
2
-1
0
Present
A32565A
Screen, Suction
1
-2
3
--2
-0
***`
A32428D
(R.H. Side, 8 cyl., 75% Cap. Red.)
Screen, Suction
--1
1
--1
-***
***
A35215A
109-A Bag, Suction Screen (not shown)
-1
------0
Present
A33474A
Bag, Suction Screen (not shown)
1
-2
3
--2
-0
***
A33474B
Bag, Suction Screen (not shown)
----2
2
-1
0
Present
A33474G
Bag, Suction Screen (not shown)
--1
1
--1
-***
***
A35234A
110 Gasket, Suction Screen Cover
1
-2
2
--2
-0
***
31892A
Gasket, Suction Screen Cover
----2
2
-1
0
Present
33493A
Gasket, Suction Tee Cover
-1
-1
--1
-0
***
11323J
Gasket, Suction Tee Cover
--1
1
--1
-***
***
35217A
111 Cover, Suction Screen
1
-2
2
--2
-0
Present
31893A
Cover, Suction Screen
----2
2
-1
0
Present
33492A
Cover, Suction Tee (for VPN 32010)
-1
-1
----0
***
13706A
Cover, Suction Tee (for VPN 36254)
--1
1
--1
-***
***
35216A
NOTES:
*
Part Number on application.
**
Quantities shown are for compressors with standard capacity reduction, and will vary if compressor is equipped with additional
steps of capacity reduction.
†
Items shown are for compressors with optional oil unloading or optional single cylinder unloading.
***
6 cylinder compressors with serial numbers below 21937 (oil unloading) and 30039 (gas unloading) are equipped with a suction
elbow and two suction screens (VPN A32428D) located behind the suction screen covers on the frame. 6 cylinder compressors
with serial numbers 21937 (oil unloading), and 30039 (gas unloading) and above are equipped with a suction tee (VPN 36254
series) and a single suction screen (VPN 35215A) located in the suction tee. 8 cylinder compressors with serial numbers below
21937 (oil unloading) and 30039 (gas unloading) are equipped with a suction tee (VPN 32010) and three suction screens, one
in the tee and two behind the suction screen covers on the frame. 8 cylinder compressors with serial numbers 21937 (oil
unloading), and 30039 (gas unloading) and above, are equipped with suction tee (VPN 36254 series) and a single suction
screen (VPN A35215A) located in the suction tee.
February 2001
Replaces
February 1985
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 6
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS FOR ALL VMC COMPRESSORS
NO. REQ. PER COMPRESSOR
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
NO. OF CYL.
112
112
112
112
113
113
114
115
116
116
117
118
118A
119
120
121
122
123 &
124A
123
123A
124A
124 +
125 +
126 +
127 +
128
130
131
5
Screw, /8” x 1½” Hex. Head Cap
5
Screw, /8” x 1¾” Hex. Head Cap *
Screw, ½” x 1½” Hex. Head Cap
Screw, ½” x 1¼” Hex. Head Cap
Valve, ½” Oil Charge & Drain (Ammonia)
Valve, ½” Oil Charge & Drain (Halo.)
Gasket, Crankcase Oil Screen
Crankcase Oil Screen Assembly
Plug, ¾” Hex. Head Pipe (not shown on 12
& 16)
Plug, ½” Hex. Head Pipe (not shown on 2
thru 8)
Pin Retaining Assy, Crankcase Oil Screen
Safety Valve (Internal Relief)
Valve, Crankcase Check (not shown)
Gasket, 2” Flange
Cover, Safety Valve
5
Screw, /8” x 2” Hex. Head Cap
Gasket, Handhole Cover
Handhole Cover and 2” Sight Glass Assy
With openings for:
560W NEMA 1&7 Htr, F.V. & Therm
300W NEMA 1&7 Htr, F.V. & Therm
560W NEMA 1&7 Heater & Therm
300W NEMA 1&7 Heater & therm
560W NEMA 1&7 Heater & Float Valve
560W NEMA 1&7 Heater
Cover, Handhole (with openings)
Cover, Handhole (without openings)
Glass, Oil Sight – 2”
Glass, Oil Sight – 3”
Washer, Oil Sight Glass – 3”
Lock, Oil Sight Glass – 3”
Gasket, Oil Sight Glass – 3”
Screw, ½” x 1½” Hex. Head Cap
Tube, Oil Feed Connector
Spring
SERIAL NO.
16
TWOSTAGE
6
12
---16
1
1
1
1
1
---16
1
1
1
1
1
-6
12
-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-1
1
2
1
1
1
-1
1
2
1
1
2
-2
2
4
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-1
1
1
1
2
16
---
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-1
1
1
1
2
16
---
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
32
1
1
SINGLE STAGE
6
8
12
2
4
--6
-1
1
1
1
1
5
---1
1
1
1
1
-6
12
-1
1
1
1
1
5
6
12
-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-1
1
2
1
1
1
-1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-1
1
1
1
2
16
---
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-1
1
1
1
2
16
---
FROM
THRU
PART
NUMBER
---16
1
1
1
1
1
0
*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
*
*
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
13152C
13152D
2796E
2796EJ
A15375A
1956A
31889A
A31886A
13264E
1
1
0
Present
13264D
1
2
-2
2
4
2
1
-2
---1
1
-2
---2
0
0
--0
0
0
0
Present
Present
--Present
Present
Present
Present
A31936A
1721B
A33568A **
11323G
31954A
13152E
31894A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
32
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-1
1
1
1
2
16
---
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
32
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
13050
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
13049
13049
13049
13049
Present
Present
Present
A33034G
A33034GA
A33034L
A33034LA
A33034G
A33034L
Order Assy
33034B
1484A
31212A
31636A
31211A
31226A
2796E
33494A
31789A
NOTES:
*
See Note ***, Page 5.
**.
For use on compressors without external oil drain arrangement.
+
The crankcase cover for the 3” sight glass is not available, but these sight glass parts can still be supplied.
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 7
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
2 THRU 8 CYLINDER COMPRESSORS
FIGURE 4
February 2001
Replaces
APRIL 1984
February 2001
Replaces
April 1984
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
12 AND 16 CYLINDER COMPRESSORS
FIGURE 5
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 8
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 9
February 2001
Replaces
April 1984
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
NO. REQ. PER COMPRESSOR
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
NO. OF CYL.
2
4
SINGLE STAGE
6
8
12
16
SERIAL NO.
TWOSTAGE
6
12
FROM
THRU
The following complete crankshaft sub-assemblies are available for all 440 VMC Compressors with aluminum pistons for 1000
compressors from serial number 3068 thru present and for 1200 RPM compressors from serial number 1660 thru present. ***
201 Complete Crankshaft Sub-Assembly Kit
1
-------See
Thru Complete Crankshaft Sub-Assembly Kit
-1
------Note
233 Complete Crankshaft Sub-Assembly Kit
--1
---1
-Above
Complete Crankshaft Sub-Assembly Kit
---1
----See
201 Complete Crankshaft Sub-Assembly Kit
----1
--1
Note
Thru Complete Crankshaft Sub-Assembly Kit
-----1
--Above
245
201 Front Brg. Cover & Relief Valve Assy.
1
1
1
1
--1
-0
Present
Thru Front Brg. Cover & Relief Valve Assy.
----1
1
-1
0
Present
211A
201 Cap, Valve
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
202 Gasket
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
203 Nut, Packing
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
204 Washers
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
Present
7
39
3
205 Packing, /8” O.D. x /64” I.D. x /8”
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
206 Stem, Valve
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
207 Spring
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
5
208 Ball, /8” Dia. Steel
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
See note††† Present
209 Front Bearing Cover Assembly †††
1
1
1
1
--1
-See note††† Present
Thru Front Bearing Cover Assembly †††
----1
1
-1
211A
209 Plug, ¼” Hex. Head Pipe
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
3
210 Plug, /8” Hex (not used after 12/81)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
211 Cover, Front Bearing
1
1
1
1
--1
-0
Present
211 Cover, Front Bearing
----1
1
-1
0
Present
211A Orifice, Oil Metering
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
21354
211B Shield, Splash (Oil Relief Outlet Hole)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
3
211C Screw, Rd Hd No. 10-32 x /8” Lg.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
Present
212 Gasket, Bearing Cover
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
5
213 Screw, /8” x 4” Hex, Socket Head Cap
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
Present
See note††† Present
214 Retainer, Front Bearing (w/oil hole)†††
1
1
1
1
--1
-See note††† Present
214 Retainer, Front Bearing (w/oil hole)†††
----1
1
-1
5
215 Screw, /8” x 2” Hex Head Cap
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
0
Present
216 Screw, ½” x 4” Hex Head Cap
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
Present
217 Seal, Rotary Shaft Assembly
1
1
1
1
--1
-0
Present
217 Seal, Rotary Shaft Assembly
----1
1
-1
0
Present
218 Gasket, Shaft Seal Cover
1
1
1
1
--1
-0
Present
218 Gasket, Shaft Seal Cover
----1
1
-1
0
Present
219 Screw, ½” x 1¾” Hex Head Cap
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
0
Present
220 Cover, Shaft Seal
1
1
1
1
--1
-0
Present
220 Cover, Shaft Seal
----1
1
-1
0
Present
220A Tube, Oil Drain
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
224 Complete Crankshaft Assy (1200 RPM)
Thru
For Aluminum Pistons *
1
-------1660
Present
233
For Aluminum Pistons *
-1
------1660
Present
For Aluminum Pistons *
--1
---1
-1660
Present
For Aluminum Pistons *
---1
----1660
Present
PART
NUMBER
RPM
KT077
KT078
KT079
KT080
KT081
KT082
A31121A
A32566A
17355A
30651C
31048A
31048D
31048B
31048C
31048F
13155K
A36240A
A36241A
13264B
13264C
**
**
33361A
35274A
1332C
31890A
13159E
31885A
33500A
13152E
2796EV
A33483A
A33489A
31897A
33496A
13153F
31044A
32564A
35078A
A32574A
A32574B
A32574C
A32574D
NOTE:
*
See page 31 for serial numbers below 1660.
**
Sold only in Front Bearing Cover Assembly.
***
Crankshafts for Cast Iron Piston for these machines are no longer available. Use current crankshaft and convert
the compressor to aluminum pistons.
†††
See note with same symbol on Page 11.
February 2001
Replaces
April 1984
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 10
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
NO. REQ. PER COMPRESSOR
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
NO. OF CYL.
224
Thru
233
224
Thru
245
(less
items
225,
226,
230,
234,
235 &
241)
224††
224††
227 *
227
228
228
229†
229†
229A
Complete Crankshaft Assy (1000 RPM)
For Aluminum Pistons
For Aluminum Pistons
For Aluminum Pistons
For Aluminum Pistons
Complete Crankshaft Assembly Kit
1000 or 1200 RPM, for Aluminum Pistons
1000 or 1200 RPM for Aluminum Pistons
Locknut and Retaining Compound Kit
Locknut and Retaining Compound Kit
Front Bearing and Retaining Compound Kit
Front Bearing and Retaining Compound Kit
Ring, Front Bearing Retainer
Ring, Front Bearing Retainer
Crankshaft (1200RPM) (with oilway plugs)
For Aluminum Pistons (††)
For Aluminum Pistons (††)
For Aluminum Pistons (††)
For Aluminum Pistons (††)
For Aluminum Pistons (††)
For Aluminum Pistons (††)
Crankshaft (1000RPM) (w/oilway plug)
For Aluminum Pistons (††)
For Aluminum Pistons (††)
For Aluminum Pistons (††)
For Aluminum Pistons (††)
For Aluminum Pistons (††)
For Aluminum Pistons (††)
1
Plug, Pipe, /8”, Hex Socket Head (N.S.)
SERIAL NO.
16
TWOSTAGE
6
12
-----
-----
--1
--
---
1
--
-1
1
-1
-1
--
1
-1
-1
--
-1
-1
-1
-1
-----
--1
----
---1
---
-1
----5
--1
---5
---1
--5
SINGLE STAGE
6
8
12
2
4
1
----
-1
---
--1
--
---1
---
---
---
1
-1
-1
--
1
-1
-1
--
1
-----1
-----5
FROM
THRU
PART
NUMBER
-----
3068
3068
3068
3068
Present
Present
Present
Present
A32574A
A32574B
A32574C
A32574D
---
1
--
0
0
Present
Present
KT068
KT069
-1
-1
-1
1
-1
-1
--
-1
-1
-1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
KT366 ++
KT367 ++
KT368
KT369
33144A
33145A
----1
--
-----1
--1
----
----1
--
1660 +
1660 +
1660
1660
0
0
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
KT370
KT371
KT372
KT373
KT375
KT376
----1
-8
-----1
8
--1
---5
----1
-8
3068
3068
3068
3068
0
0
0
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
KT370
KT371
KT372
KT373
KT375
KT376
13163A
NOTE:
*
This bearing is interchangeable with the bearing (Part No. A31988A) originally used on the 2, 4, 6 and 8 cylinder
compressors. A spacer is incorporated as an integral part of this bearing, eliminating the use of shims and a
bearing lock. When installing this bearing, do not use the shims (Item No. 230) and bearing lock (Item No. 226).
+
All 1200 RPM VMC Compressors with Serial No. 1660 and above have aluminum pistons. All other 1200 RPM
VMC Compressors with serial numbers 1659 and below have cast iron pistons. If it is desired to change from
cast iron pistons to aluminum pistons, it is absolutely necessary to change the crankshaft.
++
When ordering a crankshaft bearing locknut (Item 224) for a compressor with Serial No. 9,999 and below, also
order crankshaft bearing lockwasher (Item 225). See page 31.
†
When ordering bare crankshaft for a compressor with Serial No. 9999 and below, also order Item 224, crankshaft
bearing locknut and retaining compound kit.
††
Supplied as a kit, includes retaining compound for bearing locknut. Retaining compound also available
separately; order Part No. KT365.
N.S. = Not Shown.
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 11
February 2001
Replaces
August 1982
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
NO. REQ. PER COMPRESSOR
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
231
231A
231B
231A
231B
232
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
246
247
248
16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
1
1
2
4
2
2
2
1
1
4
4
1
8
-1
1
1
1
1
4
4
1
1
2
4
2
2
2
1
1
4
4
1
8
-1
1
1
1
1
4
4
1
------------1
-1
--
SINGLE STAGE
6
8
12
2
4
Retainer, Rear Bearing †
Rear Bearing and Lock Pin Kit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Pin, Bearing Lock +
Bearing, Rear Crankshaft
5
Screw, /16” x 1” Hex. Socket Head Cap
5
Screw, /16” x 1½” Hex. Head Cap.
Crank, Oil Pump Drive
Cap, Bearing Support *
Pin, ¼” x 1” Dowel *
Bolt, ½” x 1¾” Machine
Bearing Half, Upper Right or Lower Left
Bearing Half, Upper Left or Lower Right
Oil Dam, Center Bearing ††
Pin, Threaded Taper
Case, Bearing Support *
Washer, ½” Spring Lock
Nut, ½” Hex
9
Nut, /16” Hex
Screw, ¼” x ½” Hex. Head Cap ††
Key, Crankshaft
Key, Crankshaft
Screw, Flywheel Hub
Washer, Fllywheel Hub Screw
1
1
4
4
1
------------1
-1
--
1
1
4
4
1
------------1
-1
--
1
1
4
4
1
------------1
-1
--
1
1
4
4
1
------------1
-1
--
NO. OF CYL.
SERIAL NO.
TWOSTAGE
6
12
FROM
THRU
PART
NUMBER
1
1
0
0
Present
Present
31904A
KT353
1
1
4
4
1
1
2
4
2
2
2
1
1
4
4
1
8
-1
1
1
4233
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Present
Present
See
Note †
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
33678A
A33509A
13160D
1736G
33403A
*
13162X
11396D
33508A
33508B
33498A
33497A
*
13165F
1726E
13253F
2796AC
31994B
33505B
31956A
33495A
NOTES:
*
Matched set with pin, sold as assembly A32163A. Shown in three parts to illustrate disassembly.
+
A bearing lock pin (Item 231A) is used to keep outer face of bearing (Item 231B) from turning. If compressor
does not have groove in bottom of rear bearing cover (Item 301), make a notch with a ¼” deep radius and 17/8”
long to accommodate pin in cover.
†
Mounting holes on retainer (Item 231) were changed from counterbored holes to plain, straight-thru holes. Use
replacement screw, part number 13160D, on the former retainer with counterbored holes. Use replacement
screw, part number 1736G, on current retainer with straight-thru holes.
††
Dams (Item 239) and screws (Item 245) are not needed when using VILTER’s patented joined crankshafts. In
this design version (introduced in 1980) two 6 cylinder or two 8 cylinder crankshafts are joined by a sleeve to form
an inseparable 12 cylinder or 16 cylinder crankshaft. This specially machined sleeve eliminates the dams. This
design is completely interchangeable with the former design.
†††
See page 9 for symbol regarding this information. Compressors below serial number 21355 were furnished with
the no longer available front bearing cover assemblies A30294A (2,4,6, and 8 cylinders) or A32162A (12 and 16
cylinders), and front bearing retainer 31885A (2,4,6, and 8 cylinders) or 33500A (12 and 16 cylinders) without the
oil hole. Former front bearing retainers (31885A or 33500A) without oil holes cannot be used with current front
bearing cover assemblies A36240A (2,4,6, and 8 cylinders) and A36241A (12 and 16 cylinders), as there is no
way for oil to get to the bearing. If front bearing cover is being replaced, a current front bearing retainer (31885A
or 33500A with oil hole) must be ordered also, unless one of these current styles is already being used. If a
current front bearing retainer, (31885A or 33500A, both with oil hole) is used with former style cover (A30294A or
A32162A) having an oil hole, remove orifice in cover (A30294A or A32162A) and replace with solid 1/8” pipe plug.
February 2001
Replaces
August 1982
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
REAR BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
Compressors with Standard Tri-Micro® Filter
FIGURE 6
*
DO NOT DISASSEMBLE CENTER TUBE FACTORY PRESET RELIEF VALVE
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 12
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 13
February 2001
Replaces
July 1986
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
REAR BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS (Compressors With Standard Tri-Micro® Filter)
NO. REQ. PER COMPRESSOR
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
324
307
308
1
1
1
1
1
1
309
309
1
1
1
310
1
1
1
1
311, 312,
313 &
314
311, 312
thru 314
& 315
thru 319
&321
311
312
313
314
315
316
Spool – Strainer Tube Assembly
1
Filter Assembly (without shell)
Spool Assembly (with bypass relief)
Seal, Spool End
Strainer Tube
Ring, Retaining
Recharge (Gasket 1448B included)
Pressure Plate Assembly
(Items 317, 318 and 319)
Pressure Plate
‘O’ Ring Seal, Pressure Plate
Spring, Pressure Plate
Plug, Steel Square Head Pipe, 1/8”
Gasket, Oil Filter Head
Filter Shell with Flange and Plug
(Items 320, 322A and 322B)
Flange, Oil Filter Tank
Tank, Oil Filter
7
Screw, Hex. Head Cap /16” x 2”
Instruction/Name Plate (not shown)
Gasket, Bearing Cover
5
Screw, /8” x 2” Hex. Head Cap
Screw, ½” x 1¾”Hex Head Cap
317
318
319
320
321
322
SINGLE STAGE
6
8
12
FROM
THRU
PART
NUMBER
1
0
Present
KT092
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
**
13163E
2868H
33361A
31899A
A33480A
1
1
1
0
13374
KT361A &
B+
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
13375
Present
Present
31900A
33320A
1
1
1
1
1
13375
Present
36190A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
13375
13375
Present
Present
34759A
A35240A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
13375
Present
1448U
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
13375
Present
1448T
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
13375
13375
13375
13375
13375
13375
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
1448J
1448H
1448K
1448L
1448C
1448M
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
13375
13375
13375
13375
13375
13375
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
1448N
1448P
1448Q
13264A
1448B
A34623A
2
4
Rear Bearing Cover Assembly Kit
1
1
1
1
Cover, Rear Bearing
Plug, ¾” Hex. Socket Head Pipe
3
Pin, /8” x 1” Dowel (not shown)
Orifice, Oil Metering (not shown)
Gasket, Oil Pump body
Oil Pump Assembly
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Conversion Kit, Std. Tri-Micro
1
1
Gasket, Oil Pump Cover
Gasket, Oil Pump and Rear Bearing
Cover Seal
Cover, Oil Pump and Filter Head
(Used when Oil Cooler not used)
Cover, Oil Pump and Filter Head
(Used when Oil Cooler is used)
Filter Assy, Complete (Tri-Micro)
(Items 311 thru 322B)
1
1
NO. OF CYL.
301
Thru
304
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
Thru
SERIAL NO.
TWOSTAGE
6
12
322A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
13375 Present
35125A
322B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
13375 Present
34623A
323
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
13375 Present
1689G
324
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
13375 Present
40680AT
325
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
31890A
326
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
0
Present
13152E
327
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
0
Present
2796EL
NOTES:
A.
“Tri-Micro” is a registered trademark of Vilter Manufacturing Corporation.
**
The rear bearing cover is sold only in Kit KT092.
+
When Kit KT256 is ordered, the overall length of the existing oil pump (Item 306) on the compressor should be checked. If the
7
length from the end of the pump shaft to the end of the pump boss measures 5 /32”, a new oil pump must be ordered with Kit
KT256.
February 2001
Replaces
July 1986
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
REAR BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
Compressors With Special (Improved) Tri-Micro® Filter Option
FIGURE 7
(Typical
Arrangement)
* DO NOT DISASSEMBLE CENTER TUBE FACTORY PRESET RELIEF VALVE
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 14
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 15
February 2001
Replaces
February 1984
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
REAR BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
Compressors With Special (Improved) Tri-Micro® Filter Option
NO. REQ. PER COMPRESSOR
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
301 thru
304
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
Thru
339
307
308
16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SINGLE STAGE
6
8
12
2
4
Rear Bearing Cover Assembly Kit
1
1
1
1
Cover, Rear Bearing
Plug, ¾” Hex Socket Head Pipe
3
Pin, /8” x 1” Dowel (not shown)
Orifice, Oil Metering (not shown)
Gasket, Oil Pump Body
Oil Pump Assembly
Conversion Kit, Special (improved)
Tri-Micro Oil Filter, 120 volts
Conversion Kit, Special (improved)
Tri-Micro Oil filter, 240 volts
Gasket, Oil Pump Cover
Gasket, Oil Pump and Rear Bearing
Cover Seal
Cover, Oil Pump and Filter Head
Filter Assembly, Complete (Tri-Micro)
Spool Assembly (without bypass relief)
Seal, Spool End
Strainer Tube
Ring, Retaining
Recharge (Gasket 1448B included)
Pressure Plate Assembly
Pressure Plate
‘O’ Ring Seal, Pressure Plate
Spring, Pressure Plate
1
Plug, Steel Square Head Pipe /8”
Gasket, Oil Filter Head
Filter Shell with Bolt Ring
7
Screw, Hex Head Cap /16” x 2”
Instruction/Nameplate
Gauge, 2½”, 0-300 PSI, Oil Filter
Elbow, ¼” 90° Female Compression
Tubing, ¼” O.D. x 5 ft. Steel
Tee, ¼” Compression
Connector, ¼”MPT X ¼”O.D. Compression
Valve, 3-Way, Oil Filter
Bracket, Valve
Elbow, ¼” 90° Male Compression
Control, Pressure Differential
3
Screw, 10-32 x /8” Long, Round Head
3
Washer, Lock, /16”
3
Washer, Flat, /16”
Cover, Crankcase Handhole
Thermometer, Crankcase Oil
Heater, 535W, 115V Electric Crankcase
Heater, 535W, 230V Electric Crankcase
Gasket, Bearing Cover
5
Screw, /8” x 2” Hex Head Cap
Screw, ½” x 1¾” Hex Head Cap
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NO. OF CYL.
SERIAL NO.
TWOSTAGE
6
12
FROM
THRU
PART
NUMBER
1
0
Present
KT092
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
**
13163E
2868H
33361A
31899A
A33480A
KT361A +
1
1
1
0
Present
KT361B +
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
Present
Present
31900A
33320A
309
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
34565A
310
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
A35241A
311
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
2046A
312
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
1448H
313
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
1448K
314
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
1448L
315
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
2115C
316
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
1448M
317
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
1448N
318
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
1448P
319
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
1448Q
320
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
1190A
321
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
1448B
322
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
A34623A
323
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
0
Present
1689G
324
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
40680AJ
325
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
2047A
326
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
1892B
327
AR
AR
AR
AR
AR
AR
AR
AR
0
Present
S1589A
328
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
Present
13239C
329
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
Present
13229D
330
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
2030A
331
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
35106A
332
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
13375D
333
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
1643V
334
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
Present
1332C
335
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
Present
13165A
336
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
0
Present
13265A
337 *
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
A33034L
338 *
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
1467F
339 *
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
2069J
339 *
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
2069K
340
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Present
31890A
341
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
0
Present
13152E
342
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
0
Present
2796EL
NOTES:
AR = As required. Cut to suit when assembling.
•
Not shown here, cover replaces item 123. Thermometer and heater mount on crankcase handhole cover so oil temperature
can be monitored and raised to 100°F (thermostat setting) before starting compressor. If an attempt is made to start with cold
oil, the filter pressure differential switch will stop compressor.
**
The rear bearing cover is sold only in Kit KT092.
+
When Kit KT361A & B is ordered, the overall length of the existing oil pump (Item 306) on the compressor should be checked.
7
If the length from the end of the pump shaft to the end of the pump boss measures 5 /32”, a new oil pump must be ordered with
Kit KT361A & B.
February 2001
Replaces
February 1984
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
CYLINDER LINER AND CAPACITY CONTROL REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 8
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 16
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 17
February 2001
Replaces
March 1975
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
CYLINDER LINER AND CAPACITY CONTROL REPLACEMENT PARTS
1200 RPM HIGH STAGE AND TWO-STAGE COMPRESSORS (Serial Number 3638 to as indicated) **
NO. REQ. PER COMPRESSOR
ITEM
401
Thru
406
401
Thru
402A
DESCRIPTION
NO. OF CYL.
2
4
Cylinder Liner Kit (w/Unload-Std.)
Cylinder Liner Assy (w/Unload-Hi Suct #)
Cylinder Liner Kit (w/Unloading)
Cylinder Liner Assy (w/Unloading)
Cylinder Liner Kit (w/o Unloading)
Cylinder Liner Kit (w/o Unloading)
Cylinder Liner Kit (w/o Unloading)
Cylinder Liner Kit (w/o Unloading)
Cylinder Liner Assy (w/o Unloading)
Cylinder Liner Assy (w/o Unloading)
1*
---2
--1*
---
2
2
--2
------
SINGLE STAGE
6
8
12
4
4
--2
------
4
4
--4
------
8
8
--4
------
SERIAL NO.
16
TWOSTAGE
6
12
FROM
THRU
PART
NUMBER
8
8
--8
------
--3*
3*
-6
3*
-6
3*
3638
3638
3638
14204
3638
3638
3638
3638
14204
14204
Present
Present
14203
Present
Present
14203
14203
Present
Present
Present
KT072
A31194B
KT072
A33179B
KT071
KT071
KT071
KT071
A33179A
A33179A
--6*
6*
-12
6*
-12
6*
401
Thru
402B
401
Liner, Cylinder
2
4
6
8
12
16
--3638
Present
32687A
401
Liner, Cylinder
------6
12
3638
14203
32687A
401
Liner, Cylinder
------6
12
14204 Present
33179A
402
Seal, ‘O’ Ring (Upper)
2
4
6
8
12
16
6
12
3638
Present
2176BH
402A ++ Pin, Roll
8
16
24
32
48
64
24
48
7000
Present
1193Q
402B
Seal, ‘O’ Ring (Lower)
------6
12
14204 Present
2176BL
402
Lift Ring & Post Assy (Std)
1*
2
4
4
8
8
3*
6*
3638
Present
A33351A
403
Lift Ring & Post Assy (Hi-Suct #)
-2
4
4
8
8
--3638
Present
A33351A
405
Spring, Lift
4*
8
16
16
32
32
12*
24*
3638
Present
33352A
406
Pin, Lift
4*
8
16
16
32
32
12*
24*
3638
Present
33350A
407
Plate, Suction Valve
2
4
6
8
12
16
6
12
3638
Present
31909A
410B
411A & Piston Kit, Cap. Red. (Oil Actuated+)
1*
1
2
2
4
4
3*
6*
19247
22799
KT364
412
410,
411 &
Piston Kit, Cap. Red. (Gas Actuated+)
1*
1
2
2
4
4
3*
6*
3638
19246
KT034
412
30000
32499
410
Piston Ring (Steel-For Gas Actuated)
4*
4
8
8
16
16
12*
24*
30000
32499
31989L
410A
‘O’ Ring (Rubber-For 0.187” Groove)
1*
1
2
2
4
4
3*
6*
19247
22673
2176AX
410B
Ring Set (PTFE-For 0.120” Groove)
1*
1
2
2
4
4
3*
6*
22674
22799
2557A
411/411 Piston, Unloader (Gas or Oil)
1*
1
2
2
4
4
3*
6*
----Order Kit
A
412
Pin, Long Pivot
1*
1
2
2
4
4
3*
6*
3638
22799
33250C
413
Cap Cont Mech Assy (Std-Single) +
1*
-----3*
6*
150
22799
A33577A
Thru
Cap Cont Mech Assy (Std-Double) +
-1
2
2
4
4
--150
22799
A33354A
420
Cap Cont Mech Assy (Hi-Suct #) +
-1
2
2
4
4
--150
22799
A35253A
413
Arm, Yoke Lifting
1*
1
2
2
4
4
3*
6*
150
22799
33338A
414
Yoke Assembly (Std-Single)
1*
-----3*
6*
150
22799
A33575A
414
Yoke Assembly (Std-Double & Hi Suct)
-1
2
2
4
4
--150
22799
A33335A
3
11
415
Pin, /8” x /16” lg. Roll
1*
1
2
2
4
4
3*
6*
150
22799
1193X
416
Pin, Short Pivot
1*
1
2
2
4
4
3*
6*
30000
32499
33250B
417 *** Spring, Unloader Yoke (Std)
4*
4
8
8
16
16
12*
24*
30000
32499
33686A
417
Spring, Unloader Yoke (Hi-Suct #)
6
6
12
12
24
24
--30000
32499
33686A
418
Yoke Guide Assembly (std-single)
1*
-----3*
6*
30000
32499
A33576A
418
Yoke Guide Assembly (std-double)
-1
2
2
4
4
--30000
32499
A33347A
418
Yoke Guide Assembly (Hi Suct #)
-1
2
2
4
4
--30000
32499
A35248A
3
419
Screw, /8” x 1” Cap Lock
2*
-----6*
12*
30000
32499
1352D
420
Spacer, Sleeve
2*
-----6*
12*
30000
32499
33618A
NOTES:
*
These items are used on Two-Stage and 2 cylinder compressors only when equipped with unloading. For single cylinder
unloading, the yoke assembly (Item 414) and the two pins on the yoke guide assembly (Item 418) have drilled and tapped holes
to accommodate screws (Item 419) and spacers (Item 420).
**
Replacement parts for 1200 RPM compressors with serial numbers below 3638 are on pages 25 and 26.
***
Spring part number was 33353A and quantity was 6. Replace all springs in the assembly.
+
Actuation type can be determined by checking unloading solenoid valve – oil uses three-way valves, gas uses two-way valves.
For serial numbers above these, see page 19.
++
Four “roll pin” holes are drilled thru the safety head and safety head yoke into the cylinder liner. Drilled replacement parts are
interchangeable with undrilled parts. Discard roll pins from kits if new liner is used with former style safety head, safety head
yoke and frame with built-in guide lugs.
#
High suction compressors are identified by an “X” in the serial number.
February 2001
Replaces
March 1985
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 18
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
CYLINDER LINER AND CAPACITY CONTROL REPLACEMENT PARTS
1000 RPM HIGH STAGE AND TWO-STAGE COMPRESSORS AND 1200 RPM BOOSTER
COMPRESSORS
NO. REQ. PER COMPRESSOR
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
NO. OF CYL.
401
Thru
406
2
4
SINGLE STAGE
6
8
12
16
Cylinder Liner Kit (w/unloading)
1*
2
4
4
--Cylinder Liner Kit (w/unloading)
----8
8
Cylinder Liner Kit (w/unloading)
----8
8
Cylinder Liner Kit (w/unloading)
------Cylinder Liner Kit (w/unloading)
------401
Cylinder Liner Kit (w/o unloading)
2
2
2
4
--Thru
Cylinder Liner Kit (w/o unloading)
----4
8
402A
Cylinder Liner Kit (w/o unloading)
1*
-----Cylinder Liner Kit (w/o unloading)
------Cylinder Liner Kit (w/o unloading)
------401
Cylinder Liner Assy (w/o unloading)
------Thru 402B Cylinder Liner Assy (w/o unloading)
------401
Liner, Cylinder
2
4
6
8
--401
Liner, Cylinder
----12
16
401
Liner, Cylinder
----12
16
401
Liner, Cylinder
------401
Liner, Cylinder
------402
Seal, ‘O’ Ring (upper)
2
4
6
8
12
16
402A++ Pin, Roll
8
16
24
32
48
64
402B
Seal, ‘O’ Ring (Lower)
------403
Lift Ring & Spring Post Assembly
1*
2
4
4
--403
Lift Ring & Spring Post Assembly
----8
8
405
Spring, Lift
4*
8
16
16
--405
Spring, Lift
----16
16
405
Spring, Lift
----32
32
406
Pin, Lift
4*
8
16
16
--406
Pin, Lift
----32
32
407
Plate, Suction Valve
2
4
6
8
--407
Plate, Suction Valve
----12
16
407
Plate, Suction Valve
----12
16
408
Springs, Valve (Helical) (not shown)
----48
64
410B
411A
Piston Kit, Cap Red (Oil Actuated+)
1*
1
2
2
4
4
412
410
411
Piston Kit, Cap Red (Gas Actuated+)
1*
1
2
2
4
4
412
410
Piston Ring (Steel-for gas actuated)
4*
4
8
8
16
16
410A
‘O’ Ring (Rubber-for 0.187” Groove)
1*
1
2
2
4
4
410B
Ring Set (PTFE-for 0.120” Groove)
1*
1
2
2
4
4
411/411A Piston, Unloader (gas or oil)
1*
1
2
2
4
4
412
Pin, Long Pivot
1*
1
2
2
4
4
413 thru Capacity Control Mechanism Assembly
1*
-----420
Capacity Control Mechanism Assembly
-1
2
2
4
4
413
Arm, Yoke Lifting
1*
1
2
2
4
4
414
Yoke Assembly
1*
-----414
Yoke Assembly
-1
2
2
4
4
3
11
415
Pin, /8” x /16” lg. Roll
1*
1
2
2
4
4
416
Pin, Short Pivot
1*
1
2
2
4
4
417 ***
Spring, Unloader Yoke
4*
4
8
8
16
16
418
Yoke Guide Assembly
1*
-----418
Yoke Guide Assembly
-1
2
2
4
4
3
419
Screw, /8” x 1” Cap Lock
2*
-----420
Spacer, Sleeve
2*
-----NOTES:
*, +, ++, or *** See note with same symbol on Page 17. ** See Pages 25 and 26 for illustration.
†
Refer to Home Office for compressor with serial numbers below 150.
SERIAL NO.
TWOSTAGE
6
12
FROM
THRU
PART
NUMBER
---3*
3*
---3*
6
3*
6
---6
6
6
24
6
3*
-12*
--12*
-6
----
---6*
6*
---6*
12
6*
12
---12
12
12
48
12
6*
-24*
--24)
-12
----
0
0
2656
0
14204
0
2656
0
0
0
14204
14204
0
0
2656
0
14204
0
7000
14204
160†
2656
160†
0
2656
150†
2656
0
0
2656
0
Present
Present
Present
14203
Present
Present
Present
Present
14203
14203
Present
Present
Present
2655
Present
14203
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
2655
Present
Present
Present
Present
2655
Present
2655
KT072
KT033
KT072
KT072
A33179B
KT071
KT071
KT071
KT071
KT071
A33179A
A33179A
32687A
A32609A
32687A
32687A
33179A
2176BH
1193Q
2176BL
A33351A
A33351A
33352A
33428A
33352A
33350A
33350A
31909A
33422A
31909A
33803A
3*
6*
19247
22799
KT364
3*
6*
24*
6*
6*
6*
6*
6*
-6*
6*
-6*
6*
24*
6*
-12*
12*
19246
32499
32499
22673
22799
--22799
22799
22799
22799
22799
22799
22799
32499
32499
32499
32499
32499
32499
KT034
12*
3*
3*
3*
3*
3*
-3*
3*
-3*
3*
12*
3*
-6*
6*
150†
30000
30000
19247
22674
--150†
150†
150†
150†
150†
150†
150†
30000
30000
30000
30000
30000
30000
31989L
2176AX
2557A
Order Kit
33250C
A33577A
A33354A
33338A
A33575A
A33335A
1193X
33250B
33686A
A33576A
A33347A
1352D
33618A
SECTION 105-R
February 2001
Replaces
March 1975
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
PAGE 19
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
CAPACITY CONTROL MECHANISM ASSEMBLY (†) REPLACEMENT PARTS
Version used beginning with Serial Number:
32,500 for Gas Unloading
22,800 for Oil Unloading (++)
FIGURE 9
† Patents Pending.
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
410 &
411
410
411
413
Thru
420
Piston & Rings Assy., Cap Red
(Gas or Oil +)
Ring Set (PTFE and rubber)
Piston, Unloader (Gas or Oil)
Complete Cap Control Mech Assy
(Standard – Single Cylinder)
(Standard – Double Cylinder)
(High Suction – Single Cylinder)
(High Suction – Double Cylinder)
Arm, Yoke Lifting
Yoke Assy (Standard – Single Cylinder)
Yoke Assy (Standard – Double Cylinder)
Yoke Assy (High Suct-Single Cylinder)
Yoke Assy (High Suct-Double Cylinder)
3
11
Pin, /8” x /16” lg. Roll
Pin, Short Pivot
Spring, Unloader Yoke (Standard)
Spring, Unloader Yoke (High Suction)
Yoke Guide Assy (Std-Single Cylinder)
Yoke Guide Assy (Hi Suct-Single Cyl)
Yoke Guide Assy (Hi Suct-Double Cyl)
3
Screw, /8” x 1” Cap Lock
Spacer, Sleeve
2
-(1*)
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
4
6
8
12
1
2(3*)
2
4(6*)
PART
NUMBER
16
4
-(1*)
-(1*)
1
1
2(3*)
2(3*)
2
2
4(6*)
4(6*)
4
4
A35315BX
A35315CX
2557A
Order Assy
-(1*)
--(1*)
--(1*)
-(1*)
--(1*)
--(1*)
-(1*)
-(4*)
-(6*)
-(1*)
-(1*)
--(2*)
-(2*)
-1
-1
1
-1
-1
1
1
4
6
--1
---
-(3*)
2
-(3*)
2
2(3*)
-(3*)
2
-(3*)
2
2(3*)
2(3*)
8(12*)
12(18*)
-(3*)
-(3*)
2
-(6*)
-(6*)
-2
-2
2
-2
-2
2
2
8
12
--2
---
-(6*)
4
-(6*)
4
4(6*)
-(6*)
4
-(6*)
4
4(6*)
4(6*)
16(24*)
24(36*)
-(6*)
-(6*)
4
-(12*)
-(12*)
-4
-4
4
-4
-4
4
4
16
24
--4
---
A41787AX
A41788BX
A35305AX
A35304AX
41725A
A33575A
A33335A
A35247A
A33335A
1193X
33250B
33686A
33686A
A33576A
A35249A
A35248A
1352D
33618A
413
414
414
414
414
415
416
417
417
418
418
418
419
420
NOTES:
*, +, ++ See pages 16, 17, 18, 25 and 26 for notes and lower serial number applications.
February 2001
Replaces
February 1985
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 20
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY AND SAFETY HEAD REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 10
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 21
February 2001
Replaces
February 1985
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY AND SAFETY HEAD REPLACEMENT PARTS
1200 RPM High Stage and Two-Stage Compressors
Serial Number 3638 to Present
NO. REQ. PER COMPRESSOR
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
NO. OF CYL.
501 thru
505
501 thru
512
501
502
503
504 &
505
506 thru
512
510 &
511
506
507
509
510
510 &
511
512
513
Thru
518
513
514
515
516
517 †
517 †
518
518 †
519
520
521
NOTES:
*
**
#
++
Piston (Flat, AL) Rings and Pin Kit
Piston (Flat, AL) & Connecting Rod
Assembly Kit
Piston Ring, Compression
Piston Ring, Oil
Snap Ring, Piston Pin
Piston and Pin Assembly
Connecting Rod Assembly with
Bearings Kit
Bearing Half & Lock Nut Kit (std size)
Bearing Half & Lock Nut Kit (undersize)
Bushing, Piston Pin
Connecting Rod and Cap
3
Nut, Plain, Hex /8”-24UNF
3
Nut, Lock, /8”-24NF
Bearing Half, Conn Rod (w/o Groove)
Standard Size ++
0.015” Undersize
0.030” Undersize
Bolt, Connecting Rod
Safety Head Assembly, Ammonia
(for Helical Springs)
Safety Head Assembly, R12 and R22
(for Helical Springs)
3
Nut, Lock, /8” Valve Retaining
Washer, Diaphragm Valve
Valve, Diaphragm Discharge
Spacer, Diaphragm Valve
Safety Head, Ammonia
(for Helical Springs)
Safety Head, R12 and R22
(for Helical Springs)
Screw, Valve Retaining (60°)
Screw, Valve Retaining (82°)
Springs, Valve (Helical)
Yoke, Safety Head
Spring, Safety Head
SERIAL NO.
16
TWOSTAGE
6
12
12
12
16
16
6
6
24
8
16
8
36
12
24
12
48
16
32
16
6
8
12
4
4
4
4
8
8
6
6
6
6
12
12
8
8
8
8
16
16
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
12
12
12
12
2
4
2
2
2
6
2
SINGLE STAGE
6
8
12
FROM
THRU
PART
NUMBER
12
12
3638
3638
Present
Present
KT213
KT478
18
6
12
6
36
12
24
12
3638
3638
3638
3638
Present
Present
Present
Present
31989M
31989N **
33244A
Order Kit
16
6
12
3638
Present
KT463
12
12
12
12
24
24
16
16
16
16
32
32
6
6
6
6
12
12
12
12
12
12
24
24
3638
3638
3638
3638
3638
3638
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
KT512
KT513
31896B #
Order Kit
2027A
2028A
16
16
16
16
24
24
24
24
32
32
32
32
12
12
12
12
24
24
24
24
3638
3638
3638
3638
Present
Present
Present
Present
KT512
KT513A
KT513
31955A
6
8
12
16
6
12
3638
Present
A32695C
4
4
4
12
4
6
6
6
18
6
8
8
8
24
8
12
12
12
36
12
16
16
16
48
16
6
6
6
18
6
12
12
12
36
12
3638
3638
3638
3638
3638
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
A32695D
1776B
31990B
31939B
31990A
2
4
6
8
12
16
6
12
3638
Present
33531B
2
2
2
8
2
2
4
4
4
16
4
4
6
6
6
24
6
6
8
8
8
32
8
8
12
12
12
48
12
12
16
16
16
64
16
16
6
6
6
24
6
6
12
12
12
48
12
12
3638
3638
13491
3638
3638
3638
Present
13,490
Present
Present
Present
Present
33532B
31964A
1527B
33803A
31941B
31882A
2
4
2
2
4
4
6
6
8
8
6
2
4
2
12
4
8
4
18
6
12
6
2
4
2
2
2
2
4
4
For replacement parts for compressors having serial numbers below 3638, see page 29.
These oil rings do not require expanders. Do not use expanders. They may cause excessive wear.
Replacement bushing must be reamed after installation to properly accommodate piston pin.
Replaces bearing half with groove. If compressor has standard size bearings with groove, order 31957B-Std. Size bearing half.
If crankshaft is groove undersize, order KT513 or KT513A bearing half set with locknuts with no groove.
†
When ordering safety head (Item 517) for machines with serial number below 13491 – Item 518 (1527B) must also be ordered.
Screw hole was changed from a 60° hole to an 82° hole.
AL = Aluminum Pistons
February 2001
SECTION 105-R
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
Replaces
PAGE 22
February 1985
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY AND SAFETY HEAD REPLACEMENT PARTS
1000 RPM HIGH STAGE AND TWO-STAGE COMPRESSORS,
AND 1200 RPM BOOSTER COMPRESSORS
NO. REQ. PER COMPRESSOR
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
501
Thru
505
501
Thru
512
501
502
503
506
Thru 512
510 &
511
506
507
509
510
511
512
513
Thru
518
513
Thru
518
513
513
514
514
515
515
516
516
517 †
517 †
517 †
517 †
16
-12
-16
6
--
8
--
-12
-16
12
6
12
6
16
8
16
8
24
12
24
12
4
4
4
4
8
8
6
6
6
6
12
12
8
8
8
8
16
16
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
12
12
12
12
2
--
4
--
2
-2
-2
-6
-2
-2
SINGLE STAGE
6
8
12
FROM
THRU
PART
NUMBER
12
--
3068
2656
Present
Present
KT213
KT213
6
--
12
--
3068
2656
Present
Present
KT478
KT478
32
16
32
16
12
6
12
6
24
12
24
12
0
0
0
0
Present
Present
Present
Present
31989M
31989N **
33244A
KT463
12
12
12
12
24
24
16
16
16
16
32
32
6
6
6
6
12
12
12
12
12
12
24
24
0
0
0
0
0
0
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
KT512
KT513
31896B #
Order Kit
2027A
2028A
16
16
16
16
24
24
24
24
32
32
32
32
12
12
12
12
24
24
24
24
0
0
0
0
Present
Present
Present
Present
KT512 ++
KT513A
KT513 ++
31955A
6
--
8
--
-12
-16
6
--
12
--
2199+
2656
Present
Present
A32695C
A32695C
4
-4
-4
-12
-4
-4
6
-6
-6
-18
-6
-6
8
-8
-8
-24
-8
-8
-12
-12
-12
-36
-12
--
-16
-16
-16
-48
-16
--
6
-6
-6
-18
-6
-6
12
-12
-12
-36
-12
-12
2199+
2656
0
2656
0
2656
0
2656
0
2656
2199+
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
Present
A32695D
A32695D
1776B
1776B
31990B
31990B
31939B
31939B
31990A
31990A
33531B
--
--
--
--
12
16
--
--
2656
Present
33531B
2
4
6
8
--
--
6
12
2199+
Present
33532B
--
--
--
--
12
16
--
--
2656
Present
33532B
2
4
Piston (Flat,AL) Rings & Pin Kit
Piston (Flat,AL), Rings & Pin Kit
2
--
4
--
6
--
8
--
Piston (Flat,AL) & Conn Rod Assy Kit
Piston (Flat,AL) & Conn Rod Assy Kit
2
--
4
--
6
--
Piston Ring, Compression
Piston Ring, Oil
Snap Ring, Piston Pin
Connecting Rod Assy with Bearings Kit
4
2
4
2
8
4
8
4
Bearing Half & Lock Nut Kit (Std. Size)
Bearing Half & Lock Nut Kit (Undersize)
Bushing, Piston Pin
Connecting Rod and Cap
3
Nut, Plain, Hex /8”-24UNF
3
Nut, Lock, /8” Connecting Rod
Bearing Half, Conn. Rod (w/o Groove)
Standard Size
0.015” Undersize
0.030” Undersize
Bolt, Connecting Rod
Safety Head Assembly, Ammonia
(for Helical Springs)
(for Helical Springs)
Safety Head Assembly, R12 and R22
(for Helical Springs)
(for Helical Springs)
3
Lock Nut, /8”, Valve Retaining
3
Lock Nut, /8”, Valve Retaining
Washer, Diaphragm Valve
Washer, Diaphragm Valve
Valve, Diaphragm Discharge
Valve, Diaphragm Discharge
Spacer, Diaphragm Valve
Spacer, Diaphragm Valve
Safety Head (for Helical Springs)
Ammonia
Safety Head (for Helical Springs)
Ammonia
Safety Head (for Helical Springs) R12 &
R22
Safety Head (for Helical Springs) R12 &
R22
Screw, Valve Retaining (60°)
Screw, Valve Retaining (82°)
Screw, Valve Retaining (60°)
Screw, Valve Retaining (82°)
2
2
2
2
4
4
NO. OF CYL.
SERIAL NO.
TWOSTAGE
6
12
518
2
4
6
8
--6
12
2656
13490
31964A
518 †
2
4
6
8
--6
12
1349
Present
1527B
518
----12
16
--2656
13490
31964A
518 †
----12
16
--13491 Present
1527B
NOTES:
*
The latest design for cast iron flat top pistons utilizes a set of three compression rings (Part No. 31989M) and can be used in a
compressor having cast iron pistons with two compression rings.
#, **, ++, † See note with same symbol on page 21.
+
See note with same symbol on page 23.
A.
Abbreviation C.I. = Cast Iron Pistons; Al = Aluminum Pistons.
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 23
February 1985
February 2001
Replaces
February 1985
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY AND SAFETY HEAD REPLACEMENT PARTS
1000 RPM HIGH STAGE AND TWO-STAGE COMPRESSORS
AND 1200 RPM BOOSTER COMPRESSORS
NO. REQ. PER COMPRESSOR
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
NO. OF CYL.
519
519
520
520
521
Springs, Valve (Volute)
Springs, Valve (Helical)
Yoke, Safety Head
Yoke, Safety Head
Spring, Safety Head
2
4
8
8
2
-2
16
16
4
-4
SINGLE STAGE
6
8
12
24
24
6
-6
32
32
8
-8
-48
-12
12
SERIAL NO.
16
TWOSTAGE
6
12
FROM
THRU
PART
NUMBER
-64
-16
16
-24
6
-6
0+
2199+
0
2656
0
2198
Present
Present
Present
Present
31915A
33803A
31941B
31941B
31882A
-48
12
-12
NOTES:
+
1000 RPM high stage and VMC booster compressors with Serial No.’s 2198 and below have volute springs, with the exception
of Serial Nos. 2160, 2163, 2168, 2169, 2182, 2183, 2184, 2185, and 2186, which have helical springs. All 1000 RPM high
stage and VMC booster compressors with Serial Nos. 2199 and above have helical springs. The old type volute springs are
available. However, the safety head for volute springs is not available. If a replacement safety head for volute springs is
needed, it will be necessary to purchase the helical spring as well as the safety head for helical springs. When this conversion
is made, it is not necessary to make the conversion on all cylinders of the compressors. It may be well to do so to eliminate
confusion in the future.
February 2001
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 24
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
Replaces
March 1975
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
MODERNIZING 1200 RPM COMPRESSORS
Pages 24 through 31 pertain to replacement parts
for high speed compressors having serial numbers
below 9999. These redesigned replacement parts
are incorporated on all high speed compressors
having serial numbers 3638 and above. The
remaining repair parts pages apply to all existing
high speed 440 VMC compressors.
It is also recommended that all cylinders be
converted at one time to avoid unnecessary
complications when stocking and ordering future
replacement parts.
It will not impair the
performance of the machine if a combination of
converted and unconverted cylinders exist in one
machine; however, care must be exercised
thereafter in ordering the proper replacement parts
for each cylinder.
If it is desired to convert an existing high speed
440 VMC compressor having a serial number
below 3638 to the latest design arrangement, kits
listed below are offered, depending upon the
particular
compressor
involved.
It
is
recommended, though not mandatory, that the old
parts be replaced by these kits containing the
latest design parts when making a major parts
replacement or general overhaul of the
compressor.
Purchasing these conversion parts in kit form will
result in some savings, as opposed to the
purchasing of former style, high speed
replacement parts individually. Refer to the Home
Office for prices on these conversion kits. Include
all information (especially serial number) regarding
the compressor to be converted. Also include
correct part number for kit as listed below.
KITS ARE AVAILABLE AS FOLLOWS:
CYLINDERS WITHOUT UNLOADING
*
1.
2.
COMPRESSOR
DESCRIPTION
AMMONIA
Part Number
1200 RPM, High Stage with
Aluminum Plug Type Pistons
1200 RPM High Stage with
Cast Iron Plug Type Pistons
KT119
1200 RPM High Stage with
Aluminum Plug Type Pistons
1200 RPM High Stage with
Cast Iron Plug Type Pistons
KT073A
CYLINDERS WITH UNLOADING
R12, R22
AMMONIA
R12, R22
Part Number
Part Number
Part Number
Kits With Connecting Rod Assemblies
KT127
KT123
KT131
*
*
*
Kits Without Connecting Rod Assembly
KT075A
KT074A
*
*
*
KT076A
*
*
Kits with Cast Iron Pistons are no longer available. Please contact the home office.
Kits KT119, KT120 * (Ammonia), and Kits
KT127, KT128 * (R12, R22), for cylinders
without unloading, include the necessary
piston rings, Piston and Pin Assembly,
Piston Pin Snap Rings, Connecting Rod
Assembly, Connecting Rod Bearing
Halves, Cylinder Liner, ‘O’ Ring Seal,
Safety Head Assembly, Safety Yoke,
Suction Valve Plate, and Helical Valve
Springs required to convert one cylinder
from a plug type to a flat top piston.
Kits KT073A, KT073C * (Ammonia) and
Kits KT075A, KT075C * (R12, R22), for
cylinders without unloading include all the
parts listed in paragraph (1) except the
Connecting Rod Assembly and Connecting
Rod Bearing Halves.
3.
Kits KT123, KT124 * (Ammonia), and Kits
KT131, KT132 * (R12, R22) for cylinders
with unloading, include all the parts listed
in paragraph (1) as well as the Lift Ring
and Spring Post Assembly, Lift Springs
and Lift Pins.
4.
Kits KT074A, KT074C * (Ammonia) and
Kits KT076A, KT076C * (R12, R22) for
cylinders with unloading include all the
parts listed in paragraph (1) and (3) except
the Connecting Rod Assembly and
Connecting Rod Bearing Halves.
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 25
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
February 2001
Replaces
March 1975
OLD STYLE CYLINDER LINER & CAPACITY CONTROL REPLACEMENT PARTS
FOR 1200 RPM HIGH STAGE COMPRESSORS
WITH SERIAL NUMBERS BELOW 3638
FIGURE 11
Two Rings
Per Groove
February 2001
Replaces
August 1974
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 26
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
CYLINDER LINER AND CAPACITY CONTROL REPLACEMENT PARTS
1200 RPM HIGH STAGE COMPRESSORS
Serial Numbers 3637 and below
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
NO. OF CYL
401 thru
405
401
And
402
401
402
403
404
405
407
408
408
408
409
409
409
409
Cylinder Liner Kit
(For Cylinders w/Unloading)
Cylinder Liner Kit
(For Cylinders w/o Unloading)
(For Cylinders w/o Unloading)
Liner, Cylinder
Seal, ‘O’ Ring
Unloader Ring Assembly
Washer, Unloader Spring
Spring, Unloader Ring
Plate, Suction Valve
Spring, Valve (Volute)
Spring, Valve (Helical)
Spring, Valve (Damped Helical)
Outer Seat, Ammonia or R12 & R22
Discharge Valve (for Volute Springs)
Outer Seat, Ammonia or R12 & R22
Discharge Valve (for Helical Springs)
Outer Seat, Ammonia Discharge Valve
(for Damped Helical Springs)
Outer Seat, R12 & R22 Discharge Valve
(for Damped Helical Springs)
Piston Kit, Capacity Reduction
2
NO. REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
4
6
8
12
16
SERIAL NO.
FROM
THRU
PART
NO.
1*
2
4
4
8
8
0
3637
KT033
2
1*
2
2
1*
2*
2*
2
8
8
8
2
-4
4
2
4
4
4
16
16
16
2
-6
6
4
8
8
6
24
24
24
4
-8
8
4
8
8
8
32
32
32
4
-12
12
8
16
16
12
-48
48
8
-16
16
8
16
16
16
-64
64
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0+
2050+
3290+
3637
3637
3637
3637
3637
3637
3637
3637
2049
3289
3637
KT032
KT032
A32609A
2176BH
A33434A
33436A
33428A
33422A
31915A
33803A
13556A††
2
4
6
8
--
--
0+
2049
Obsolete
2
4
6
8
12
16
2050+
3289
Obsolete
2
2
4
4
6
6
8
8
12
12
16
16
3290+
3290+
3637
3637
33587A††
33586A††
410 thru
1*
1
2
2
4
4
150
3637
KT034
412
410
Piston Ring, Unloader
4*
4
8
8
16
16
150
3637
35278A
411
Piston
1*
1
2
2
4
4
150
3637
31989L
412
Pin, Long Pivot
1*
1
2
2
4
4
150
3637
33250C
413
Complete Capacity Control Mechanism Assy
1*
-----150
3637
A33577A
Thru
Complete Capacity Control Mechanism Assy
-1
2
2
4
4
150
3637
A33354A†
420
413
Arm, Yoke Lifting
1*
1
2
2
4
4
150
3637
33338A
414
Yoke Assembly
1*
-----150
3637
A33575A
414
Yoke Assembly
-1
2
2
4
4
150
3637
A33335A
3
11
415
Pin, /8” x /16” long Roll
1*
1
2
2
4
4
150
3637
1193X
416
Pin, Short Pivot
1*
1
2
2
4
4
150
3637
33250B
417
Spring, Unloader Yoke
6*
6
12
12
24
24
150
3637
33686A
418
Yoke Guide Assembly
1*
-----150
3637
A33576A
418
Yoke Guide Assembly
-1
2
2
4
4
150
3637
A33347A
3
419
Screw, /8” x 1” Nylok Cap
2*
-----150
3637
1352D
420
Spacer Sleeve
2*
-----150
3637
33618A
NOTES:
*
These items used on 2 cylinder compressors only when equipped with unloading. For single cylinder unloading, the yoke
assembly (Item 414) and two pins on the yoke guide assembly (Item 418) have drilled and tapped holes to accommodate screws
(Item 419) and spacers (Item 420).
+
All 1200 RPM VMC Compressors equipped with old style 1200 RPM parts from Serial No. 2050 thru 3289 had helical valve
springs. Below 2050 had volute springs except 829, 831, 1489, 1706, 1707, 1723, 1733 and 1735, which also had helical springs.
Above 3289 and thru 3637 had damped helical springs. Individual springs of each type are available for replacement; however,
discharge valve outer seats to accommodate only the damped helical springs are available obsoleting all other seats. Therefore,
when ordering seats for replacement on models previous to 3290, four damped helical valve springs must also be ordered with
each seat. Damped springs must then be specified for any subsequent spring replacement. It is not essential that this change be
7
made on all cylinders if made on one. As a means of identification, the regular helical springs are /16” long and are constructed
17
with two dead coils at the end of the spring that is inserted into the hole. The damped springs are /32” long and are constructed
with a special coil at one end with a closer winding pitch (not completely closed). If desired, see page 24 for converting to new
style 1200 RPM parts.
†
Refer to Home Office for Compressors with Serial Numbers below 150.
††
Also available in Kit KT035, KT036 or KT037. See page 29.
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 27
February 2001
Replaces
March 1975
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
CYLINDER LINER AND CAPACITY CONTROL REPLACEMENT PARTS
1000 RPM HIGH STAGE AND 1200 RPM BOOSTER COMPRESSORS
Serial Numbers 2655 and below
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
NO. OF CYL
401
Thru
402A
403
404
409
409
2
NO. REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
4
6
8
12
16
SERIAL NO.
FROM
THRU
PART
NO.
Cylinder Liner Kit (w/o unloading)
--
--
--
--
4
8
0
2655
KT032
Unloader Ring Assembly
Washers, Unloader Spring
Outer Seat, Ammonia Discharge Valve
Outer Seat, R12 & R22 Discharge Valve
-----
-----
-----
-----
8
16
12
12
8
16
16
16
0
0
0
0
2655
2655
2655
2655
A33434A
33436A
33587A
33586A
NOTE:
These parts are given for information purposes only – parts are no longer available.
February 2001
Replaces
August 1974
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
OLD STYLE PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD REPLACEMENT PARTS
1200 RPM COMPRESSORS
SERIAL NUMBERS BELOW 3638
FIGURE 12
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 28
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 29
February 2001
Replaces
March 1984
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD REPLACEMENT PARTS
FOR 1200 RPM HIGH STAGE
Serial Numbers Below 3638
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
NO. OF CYL
501 thru
512
501
502
503
504 and
505
506,507,
510,511 &
512
506
507
509
510
511
511
512
519
Thru
525
Except
521
519 thru
525
Except 521
Plus 408 &
409
519
519
519
520
Piston (Cup, CI) and Conn. Rod Assy Kit
Piston (Cup, AL) and Conn. Rod Assy Kit
Piston Ring, Compression
Piston Ring, Oil
Snap Ring, Piston Pin
Piston (Cup, CI) and Piston Pin Assy
Piston (Cup, AL) and Piston Pin Assy
Connecting Rod Assembly with
Bearing Kit
2
2
2
4
2
4
2
2
2
NO. REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
4
6
8
12
16
4
6
8
--4
6
8
12
16
8
12
16
24
32
4
6
8
12
16
8
12
16
24
32
4
6
8
--4
6
8
12
16
4
6
8
12
16
SERIAL NO.
FROM
THRU
0*
1659
1660*
3637
0
3637
0
3637
0
3637
0*
1659
1660*
3637
0
3637
PART
NO.
KT116
KT117
31989M
31989N
33244A
A32457A
A32567A
KT212
Bushing, Piston Pin
Connecting Rod and Cap
3
Nut, Plain, Hex /8”-24UNF
3
Nut Lock, /8”-24NF
Bearing Half, Connecting Rod
Bearing Half, Connecting Rod .030” Undersize
Bolt, Connecting Rod
Safety Yoke and Discharge Valve Inner
Seat Assembly (for Volute Springs)
(for Helical Springs)
(for Damped Helical Springs, Amm&R22)
(for Damped Helical Springs, R12
Complete Safety Yoke Assy Kit (Amm)
Complete Safety Yoke Assy Kit (R12)
Complete Safety Yoke Assy Kit (R22)
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
6
6
12
12
12
8
8
16
16
16
12
12
24
24
24
16
16
32
32
32
0
0
0
0
0
3637
3637
3637
3637
3637
31896B #
Order Kit
2027A
2028A
KT512 ++
4
4
8
8
12
12
16
16
24
24
32
32
0
0
3637
3637
KT513 ++
31955A
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
-12
12
12
12
12
12
-16
16
16
16
16
16
0+
2050+
3290+
3290+
0
0
0
2049
3289
3637
3637
3637
3637
3637
Obsolete
Obsolete
A33588A
A33588B
KT035
KT036
KT037
Springs, Valve (Volute)
Springs, Valve (Helical)
Springs, Valve (Damped Helical)
Safety Yoke and Pin Assembly (for Volute Springs)
(for Helical Springs)
(for Damped Helical Springs)
Spring, Safety Head
Nut, 1” Flexloc
Plate, Discharge Valve – Ammonia, R22
Plate, Discharge Valve – R12
Inner Seat, Discharge Valve
16
16
16
32
32
32
48
48
48
64
64
64
-96
96
-128
128
0+
2050+
3290+
2049
3289
3637
31915A
33803A
13556A
2
2
2
2
2
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
8
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
12
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
16
8
8
-12
12
12
12
24
12
12
-16
16
16
16
32
16
16
0+
2050+
3290+
0
0
0
0
0
2049
3289
3637
3637
3637
3637
3637
3637
Obsolete
Obsolete
A33585A
31882A
1330B
33423A
33423A
33421A
521
523
524
524
525
NOTES:
Designation: C.I. = Cast Iron Pistons; Al. = Aluminum Pistons.
*
All 1200 RPM VMC Compressors with Serial No. 1660 and above have aluminum pistons except 1875, 1876 and 1880, which
have cast iron pistons. All other 1200 RPM VMC’s have cast iron pistons with the exception of Serial No. 1489, which has the
aluminum pistons. See note on Page 10 for crankshaft requirements.
+
All 1200 RPM VMC Compressors equipped with old style 1200 RPM parts from Serial No. 2050 thru 3289 had helical valve
springs. Below 2050 had volute springs except 829, 831, 1489, 1706, 1707, 1723, 1733 and 1735, which also had helical springs.
Above 3289 and thru 3637 had damped helical springs. Individual springs of each type are available for replacement; however,
safety yoke and pin assemblies and safety yoke and discharge valve inner seat assemblies to accommodate only the damped
helical springs are available, obsoleting all previous comparable assemblies. Therefore, when ordering these assemblies for
replacement on models previous to 3290, eight damped helical valve springs must also be ordered with each assembly. Damped
springs must then be specified for any subsequent spring replacement. It is not essential that this change be made on all
7
cylinders if made on one. As a means of identification, the regular helical springs are /16" long and constructed with two dead
17
coils at the end of the spring that is inserted into the hole. The damped springs are /32” long and are constructed with a special
coil at one end with a closer winding pitch (not completely closed). If desired, see page 24 for converting to new style 1200 RPM
parts.
#, ++
See note with same symbol on page 21.
February 2001
Replaces
February 1985
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 30
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY AND SAFETY HEAD REPLACEMENT PARTS
1000 RPM HIGH STAGE AND 1200 RPM BOOSTER COMPRESSORS
Serial Numbers 3067 and below
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
NO. OF CYL
501
Thru
505
501
Thru
512
504 &
505
519
Thru
525
Except
521
520
523
524
524
525
2
NO. REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
4
6
8
12
16
SERIAL NO.
FROM
THRU
PART
NO.
Piston (Flat, CI) Rings & Pin Kit
2
4
6
8
--
--
0
3067
KT214
Piston (Flat, CI) & Conn Rod Assy Kit
Piston (Cup, AL) & Conn Rod Assy Kit
2
--
4
--
6
--
8
--
-12
-16
0
0
3067
2655
KT114
KT117
Piston (Cup, AL) & Pin Assy
--
--
--
--
12
16
0
2655
A32567A
Safety Yoke & Discharge Valve Inner
Seat Assy – Amm & R22
Safety Yoke & Discharge Valve Inner
Seat Assy – R12
--
--
--
--
12
16
0
2655
A33588A
--
--
--
--
12
16
0
2655
A33588B
Assembly, Safety Yoke & Pin
Nut, 1” Flexloc
Plate, Discharge Valve – Amm & R22
Plate, Discharge Valve – R12
Inner Seat, Discharge Valve
------
------
------
------
12
12
24
12
12
16
16
32
16
16
0
0
0
0
0
2655
2655
2655
2655
2655
A33585A
1330B
33423A
33423A
33421A
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 31
February 2001
Replaces
April 1984
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
Serial Numbers 9999 and below
NO. REQ. PER COMPRESSOR
ITEM
220
224
Thru
233
224
Thru
233
225
225
226
229 †
229 †
DESCRIPTION
SERIAL NO.
16
TWOSTAGE
6
12
--
--
1
-1
---
---
1
-1
-1
-1
1
-1
---1
--
---
1
--
-1
---
1
--
-1
SINGLE STAGE
6
8
12
NO. OF CYL.
2
4
Shim, Rear Bearing Retainer
Complete Crankshaft Assy (1200 RPM)
For Cast Iron Pistons
For Cast Iron Pistons
Complete Crankshaft Assy (1000 RPM)
For Cast Iron Pistons
For Cast Iron Pistons
Lockwasher, Crankshaft Bearing
Lockwasher, Crankshaft Bearing
Lock, Bearing
Crankshaft (1200 RPM) (w/oilways plug)
For Cast Iron Pistons (*)
For Cast Iron Pistons (*)
Crankshaft (1000 RPM) (w/oilways plug)
For Cast Iron Pistons (*)
For Cast Iron Pistons (*)
1
1
1
1
---
---
1
--
--1
-1
--1
-1
-----
FROM
THRU
PART
NUMBER
--
0
1659
A31905A
---
---
0
0
1659
1659
A32612C
A32612D
---1
--
--1
-1
---1
--
0
0
0
0
0
3067
3067
9999
9999
1659
A32612C
A32612D
33365A +
35502A +
31902A
---
---
---
---
0
0
1659
1659
A30291A
A30304A
---
---
---
---
0
0
3067
3067
A30291A
A30304A
NOTES:
*
Some compressors using cast iron pistons were equipped with an obsolete oil pump drive. If the compressor is not equipped with
Item 233, and an interchangeable replacement crankshaft is ordered, it is necessary to order Item 233 at extra cost.
+
When ordering a crankshaft bearing locknut (Item 224) for a compressor with Serial No. 9999 and below, also order crankshaft
bearing lockwasher (Item 225).
†
When ordering bare crankshaft for a compressor with Serial No. 9999 and below, also order Item 224, crankshaft bearing locknut
and retaining compound kit.
***
Crankshafts for Cast Iron Piston for these machines are no longer available. Use current crankshaft and convert the compressor
to aluminum pistons.
February 2001
Replaces
March 1984
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 32
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
HEAVY-DUTY (+) V-BELT DRIVEN REPLACEMENT PARTS
“Heavy-Duty” 8-cylinder 440 VMC Compressors are also available for use with V-Belt drives up to a maximum of 125
BHP as compared to the maximum of 100 BHP for the standard, 8-cylinder 440 VMC Compressors. This compressor
will supplement, not replace, the standard 8-cylinder 440 VMC Compressor. This higher BHP is possible due to
modifications of design. Construction of the “Heavy-Duty” compressor will be the same as the standard 8-cylinder 440
VMC Compressor except that a 12 or 16-cylinder front bearing cover assembly and rotary shaft seal replace the standard
8-cylinder parts. The crankshaft (†) is of special stepped design with a 3” diameter on the drive end and a 2½” diameter
on the pump end. The standard 8-cylinder 440 VMC Compressor has a straight shaft of 2½” diameter.
REPAIR PARTS FOR 8-CYLINDER 1000 AND 1200 RPM HEAVY-DUTY 440 VMC COMPRESSORS
CAN BE SELECTED FROM THE PRECEDING REPAIR PARTS PAGES
FOR THE LATEST DESIGN OF STANDARD 8-CYLINDER COMPRESSOR
WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE FOLLOWING:
ITEM
NUMBER
PART
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
REQUIRED
NUMBER
201 thru 211A
Front Bearing Cover and Relief Assembly
1
A32566A
209 thru 211A
Front Bearing Cover Assembly
1
A36241A
211
Cover, Front Bearing
1
*
214
Retainer, Front Bearing
1
33500A
217
Rotary Shaft Seal Assembly
1
A33489A
218
Gasket, Shaft Seal Cover
1
33496A
220
Cover, Shaft Seal
1
32564A
224 thru 233 †
Complete Crankshaft Assembly (for Aluminum Pistons)
1
A32792B
224 **
Locknut and Retaining Compound Kit
1
KT367
227 **
Front Bearing and Retaining Compound Kit
1
KT369
228
Ring, Front Bearing Retaining
1
33145A
229 **†
Crankshaft and Retaining Compound Kit (for Aluminum Pistons)
1
KT374
229 †
Crankshaft (for Cast Iron Pistons)
1
A32255A
501 thru 505
Piston (Flat, Cast Iron), Rings and Pin Assembly Kit
8
KT214
501 thru 505
Piston (Flat, Aluminum), Rings and Pin Assembly Kit
8
KT213
501
Piston Ring, Compression
24
31989M
502
Piston Ring, Oil
8
31989N
501 thru 512
Piston (Cast Iron) Assembly and Connecting Rod Kit
8
KT114
501 thru 512
Piston (Aluminum) Assembly and Connecting Rod Kit
8
KT478
NOTES:
*
Sold only in front bearing cover assembly.
**
Includes retaining compound for bearing lock nut. Retaining compound also available separately, order part number KT365.
†
Shot peening is not standard on “Heavy-Duty” crankshafts, but is available as an option.
+
Heavy-Duty compressors are identified by “HD” in the serial number.
SECTION 105-R
PAGE 33
February 2001
Replaces
February 1984
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
440 VMC COMPRESSORS
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST
ITEM
PART NAME
--------118
217
217
306
315
Gasket Kit, Complete
Gasket Kit, Complete
Gasket Kit, Complete
Gasket Kit, Complete
Gasket Kit, Complete
Gasket Kit, Complete
Gasket Kit, Complete
Gasket Kit, Complete
Safety Valve (Internal Relief)
Rotary Shaft Seal Assembly
Rotary Shaft Seal Assembly
Oil Pump Assembly (for all 440 VMC Compressor)
Recharge (Includes Gasket 1448B)
(Standard Tri-Micro Filter)
Recharge (Includes Gasket 1448B)
(Special-Improved Tri-Micro Filter Option)
Gasket, Oil Filter Head
Cylinder Liner Kit (for Cylinder w/o Unloading)
a. 1000 RPM Compressors
b. 1200 RPM Compressors Serial No. 3638
to present
Cylinder Liner Kit (for Cylinder w/Unloading)
a. 1000 RPM Compressors
b. 1200 RPM Compressors Serial No. 0 to
3637
c. 1200 RPM Compressors Serial No. 3638
to Present
Spring, Lift – 1000 RPM (1200 RPM, 3638 to
Present) and All Boosters
Spring, Lift – 1200 RPM below Serial No. 3638
Suction Valve Plate – 1000 RPM (1200 RPM,
3638 to Present) and All Boosters
Suction Valve Plate – 1200 RPM, below Serial No.
3638
Capacity Control Assembly
a. Two Cylinder and Two-Stage Compressors
b. All Other Compressors
Piston and Connecting Rod Assembly Kit
a. Cast Iron, Flat Top Piston (1000 RPM)
b. Aluminum, Flat Top Piston (All Speeds)
Piston Ring, Compression
Piston Ring, Oil
3
Nut, Plain, Hex /8”-24UNF
3
Nut, Lock, /8”-NF
Bearing Half, Connecting Rod
Bolt, Connecting Rod
Safety Head Assy, Ammonia (All Speeds)
Safety Head Assy, Halocarbon (All Speeds)
315
321
401
Thru
402A
401
Thru
406
405
405
407
407
413
Thru
420
501
Thru
512
501
502
509
510
511
512
513
Thru
518
515
518
519
519
519
524
Diaphragm Discharge Valve Plate (all speeds)
Valve Retaining Screw
Valve Springs (Volute)
Valve Springs (Helical)
Valve Springs (Damped Helical – 1200 RPM)
Discharge Valve Plate, 1200 RPM Compressor Serial No. 0 to 3637
PART
NUMBER
QUANTITY PER COMPRESSOR
RECOMMENDED FOR STOCK
SINGLE STAGE
TWO STAGE
6
8
12
16
6
12
------------1
------1
------1
------1
------1
------1
1
1
2
2
--1
1
--1
---1
1
-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
KT041
KT043
KT045
KT049
KT051
KT055
KT056
KT089
1721B
A33483A
A33489A
A33480A
2
1
-------1
1
-1
4
-1
------1
1
-1
1448C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2115C
1448B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
KT071
KT071
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
KT072
KT033
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
--
2
--
KT072
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
33352A
4
4
8
8
8
8
8
8
33428A
31909A
2
1
2
1
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
-2
-2
33422A
1
1
2
2
2
2
--
--
A33577A
A33354A
1
--
-1
-1
-1
-2
-2
1
--
2
--
KT114
KT478
31989M
31989N
2027A
2028A
KT512
31955A
A32695C
A32695D
1
1
6
1
4
4
2
4
1
1
1
1
12
1
8
8
4
8
1
1
2
2
12
2
12
12
6
12
2
2
2
2
12
2
16
16
8
16
2
2
2
2
18
2
24
24
12
24
3
3
2
2
24
2
32
32
16
32
3
3
-2
12
2
12
12
6
12
2
2
-2
18
2
24
24
12
24
3
3
31939B
1527B
31915A
33803A
13556A
6
2
8
8
8
12
4
16
16
16
18
6
24
24
24
24
8
32
32
32
36
12
-48
48
48
16
-64
64
18
6
-24
--
36
12
-32
--
33423A
2
2
4
4
4
4
--NOTES:
A.
The above listing includes the minimum selection and quantity of recommended spare parts. It may vary considerably depending
upon the circumstances. All items listed do not necessarily apply to every compressor, because of serial number application or
optional features. Items that apply should be selected for each individual compressor.
B.
All of the above parts can be used with either ammonia, R12 or R22 compressors unless specified otherwise.
February 2001
Original Issue
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
SECTION 105-X
PAGE 1
460 VMC COMPRESSORS
REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
REPLACEMENT PARTS ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS
BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration, 2 Cylinder (Figure 1)
Illustration, 4, 6 & 8 Cylinder (Figure 2)
Parts List
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration (Figure 3)
Parts List
REAR BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration (Figure 4)
Parts List
CYLINDER LINER AND CAPACITY CONTROL REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration (Figure 5)
Parts List
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY AND SAFETY HEAD REPLACEMENT PARTS
Illustration (Figure 6)
Parts List
REPLACEMENT PARTS ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS
1.
Give the size, voltage, original order number and serial number of the compressor. All of this information is
stamped on the nameplate attached to the compressor frame. The serial number is also stamped on the
compressor frame. The compressor frame serial number location is directly above the suction flange on the
frame of the compressor or directly above the rear bearing cover. The rear bearing is located on the oil
pump/filter end of the compressor.
2.
Always give the name of the part as well as the corresponding part number and/or item number. Also
include the quantity of parts required.
3.
Should there be a doubt regarding the part number or name, send a sketch of the part required or return the
old part as a sample, transportation charges prepaid. Orders on which part numbers and description do not
agree will be filled according to our best interpretation.
4.
All prices are F.O.B. factory. Minimum domestic parts order is $75.00 net price.
5.
Please indicate on the order preferred method of shipment. We will follow your instructions unless it is to
your best interest to change routing.
6.
If you purchased the compressor from a party other than Vilter Manufacturing Corporation, please state
when you purchased the compressor and from whom.
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
PRINTED IN U.S.A.
SECTION 105-X
PAGE 2
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
460 VMC COMPRESSORS
2 CYLINDER BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 1
February 2001
Original Issue
February 2001
Original Issue
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
460 VMC COMPRESSORS
4, 6 AND 8 CYLINDER BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 2
SECTION 105-X
PAGE 3
SECTION 105-X
PAGE 4
February 2001
Original Issue
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
460 VMC COMPRESSORS
BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
101
102
102
103
104
105
Frame
5
Screw, /8” x 2 ½” Hex. Head Cap (Used w/o Water Jacket)
5
Screw, /8” x 3 ½” Hex. Head Cap (Used with Water Jacket)
Cover, Water Jacket
Gasket, Water Jacket
Cover, Cylinder
w/o Capacity Reduction
w/Capacity Reduction
w/Capacity Reduction
Banks w/o Capacity Reduction
w/Capacity Reduction
Gasket, Cylinder Cover
5
Stud, /8” x 3” (shown only on 2 cylinder)
Stud, ¾” x 3¼” (not shown)
5
Nut, /8-11NC-2B
Nut, ¾-10NC-2B
Tee, Suction (++)
2½” x 2½”
3½” x 3”
Elbow, Discharge (++)
2” x 2” (Ammonia)
2½” x 2½” (Ammonia)
3” x 3” (Ammonia)
4” x 3” (Ammonia)
Suction Screen
Suction Screen
Suction Screen (Center)
Suction Screen (R.H. Side, 8 cyl., 75% Cap. Red.)
Bag, Suction Screen (not shown)
Bag, Suction Screen (not shown)
Bag, Suction Screen (not shown)
Gasket, Suction Screen Cover
Gasket, Suction Screen Cover
Gasket, Suction Cover
Cover, Suction Screen
Cover, Suction Screen
Cover, Suction Screen
5
Screw, /8” x 1½” Hex. Head Cap
5
Screw, /8” x 1¾” Hex. Head Cap
Valve, ½” Oil Charge and Drain (Ammonia)
Valve, ½” Oil Charge and Drain (Halocarbon)
Nipple, ½” x 4” Sch. 80 Pipe
Gasket, Crankcase Oil Screen
Crankcase Oil Screen Assembly
Plug, ½” Hex. Head Pipe
Plug, ¾” Hex. Head Pipe
Pin Retaining Assembly for Compressor Oil Screen
Safety Valve, Internal Relief
Gasket, 2” Flange
Cover, Safety Valve
5
Screw, /8” x 2” Hex. Head Cap
Gasket, Handhole Cover
106
107
107
107A
107A
108
109
109
109
109
109-A
109-A
109-A
110
110
110
111
111
111
112
112
113
113
113A
114
115
116
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
NOTES:
*
Part Number on application.
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
2
4
6
8
1
1
1
1
20
40
60
80
20
40
60
80
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
PART
NUMBER
*
13152G
13152L
30299A
33329A
--1
1
1
1
8
--
1
1
---2
4
4
--1
1
1
3
4
4
2
2
---4
4
4
--
4
4
4
A30332A
30332B
A30364A
A30364A
30364B
33330A
13156D
13157D
1726G
1726H
1
--
-1
---
---
A30319A
A32417B
1
---1
----1
-1
--1
---6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
-1
---1
--1
---1
--1
-5
-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
--1
-2
----2
1
2
-1
2
-1
-12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
---1
2
-1
1
-3
1
2
-1
2
1
1
5
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
12270E
12270F
12271E
A32498A
A32428B
A32428A
A32428C
A32428D
A33474A
A33474B
A35234A
31892A
11323J
35217A
31893A
13706A
35216A
13152E
13153E
A15375A
1956A
13189G
31889A
A31886A
13264D
13264E
A31936A
1721B
11323G
31954A
13152E
31894A
February 2001
Original Issue
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
SECTION 105-X
Page 5
460 VMC COMPRESSORS
BASIC FRAME REPLACEMENT PARTS
ITEM
123 &
124
123A
124
125
DESCRIPTION
Handhole Cover and 2” Sight Glass Assy
With openings for:
560W NEMA 1 & 7 Htr., F.V. & Therm.
300W NEMA 1 & 7 Heater and Therm.
560W NEMA 1 & 7 Htr. & Therm.
300W NEMA 1 & 7 Htr. & Therm.
Cover, Handhole (without openings) (not shown)
Glass, Oil Sight – 2”
Screw, ½” x 1½” Hex Head Cap
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
2
4
6
8
PART
NUMBER
1
1
1
1
-1
16
A33034G
A33034GA
A33034L
A33034LA
33034B
1484A
2796E
1
1
1
1
-1
16
1
1
1
1
-1
16
1
1
1
1
-1
16
SECTION 105-X
PAGE 6
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
460 VMC COMPRESSORS
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 3
February 2001
Original Issue
SECTION 105-X
PAGE 7
February 2001
Original Issue
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
460 VMC COMPRESSORS
CRANKSHAFT AND FRONT BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
ITEM
201 thru
211
201
202 thru
208
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209 thru
211
209 thru
211
209
210
211
211B
211C
212
213
214
215
216
217 & 218
217
218
219
220 & 220A
220A
224
Thru
233
224
227
228
229
231
231A & 231B
232
233
246
247
248
DESCRIPTION
Front Bearing Cover and Relief Valve Assy
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
2
4
6
8
1
1
1
1
PART
NUMBER
A32566A
Cap, Valve
Oil Relief Valve Kit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
17355A
KT486
Gasket, Valve Cap
Nut, Packing
Washer
7
39
3
Packing, /8” O.D. x /64” I.D. x /8”
Stem, Valve
Spring
5
Ball, /8” dia. Steel
Front Bearing Cover Assembly for 2 ½” Shaft
(Requires Oil Orifice in Item 214)
Front Bearing Cover Assembly for 3” Shaft
(Requires Oil Orifice in Item 214)
Plug, ¼” Hex Head Pipe
3
Plug, /8” Hex Head Pipe
Cover, Front Bearing
Shield, Splash
3
Screw, Hexagon Hd. No. 10-32 x /8” long
Gasket, Bearing Cover
5
Screw, /8” x 4” Hex Socket Head Cap
Retainer, Front Bearing (with Oil Hole)
5
Screw, /8” x 2” Hex Head Cap
Screw, ½” x 4” Hex Head Cap
Seal and Gasket Kit
Seal, Rotary Shaft Assembly
Gasket, Shaft Seal Cover
Screw, ½” x 1¾” Hex Head Cap
Cover and Tube Assembly, Shaft Seal
Drain Tube
Crankshaft and Bearings Assembly *
Crankshaft and Bearings Assembly *
Crankshaft and Bearings Assembly *
Crankshaft and Bearings Assembly *
Locknut and Retaining Compound Kit
Front Bearing and Retaining Compound Kit
Ring, Front Bearing Retainer
Crankshaft and Retaining Compound Kit *
for Aluminum Pistons
for Aluminum Pistons
for Aluminum Pistons
for Aluminum Pistons
Retainer, Rear Bearing
Rear Bearing and Lock Pin
5
Screw /16” x 1½” Hex. Head
Crank, Oil Pump Drive
Key, 2½” Crankshaft
Screw, Flywheel Hub
Washer, Flywheel Hub Screw
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
30651C
31048A
31048D
31048E
31048C
31048F
13155K
A36240A
1
1
1
1
A36241A
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
6
3
1
1
1
8
1
1
1
---1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
6
3
1
1
1
8
1
1
-1
--1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
6
3
1
1
1
8
1
1
--1
-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
6
3
1
1
1
8
1
1
---1
1
1
1
13264B
13264C
Order Assy
35274A
2583A
31890A
13159E
31885A
13152E
13153Q
KT509
A33483A
31897A
13153F
A32564A
35078A
A34555HX
A34555KX
A34555LX
A34555BX
KT366
KT368
33144A
1
---1
1
4
1
1
1
1
-1
--1
1
4
1
1
1
1
--1
-1
1
4
1
1
1
1
---1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
KT370
KT371
KT372
KT373
31904A
KT353
1736G
33403A
31994B
31956A
33495A
February 2001
Original Issue
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
SECTION 105-X
PAGE 8
460 VMC COMPRESSORS
REAR BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 4
* DO NOT DISASSEMBLE CENTER TUBE –
FACTORY PRESET RELIEF VALVE
SECTION 105-X
PAGE 9
February 2001
Original Issue
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
460 VMC COMPRESSORS
REAR BEARING COVER REPLACEMENT PARTS
ITEM
301 thru
304 & 333
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
309
310
311
311A,312,
313 & 314
311A, 312
Thru 314 &
315A thru
319 & 321
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
322A
322B
323
324 ***
324 **
325
326
327
327A
328
329
329A
330
331
332
333
334
335
DESCRIPTION
Rear Bearing Cover Assembly Kit
Cover, Rear Bearing
Plug, ¾” Hex Socket Head Pipe
3
Pin, /8” x 1” Dowel
Orifice, Oil Metering (not shown)
Gasket, Oil Pump Body
Oil Pump Assembly
Gasket, Oil Pump Cover
Gasket, Oil Pump and Rear Bearing Cover Seal
Cover, Oil Pump and Filter Head (used when Oil Cooler
not used)
Cover, Oil Pump and Filter Head (used when Oil Cooler
is used)
Filter Assy., Complete (with Bypass Relief)
Spool Assembly (with Bypass Relief)
Spool – Strainer Tube Assembly
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
2
4
6
8
1
1
1
1
PART
NUMBER
KT092
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Order Kit
13163E
2868H
33361A
31899A
A33480A
31900A
33320A
36190A
1
1
1
1
34760AB
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A35240A
1448J
1448U
Filter Assembly (without Shell)
1
1
1
1
1448T
Seal, Spool End
Strainer Tube
Ring, Retaining
Recharge (with Bypass)
Pressure Plate Assembly
Pressure Plate
‘O’ Ring Seal, Pressure Plate (not shown)
Spring, Pressure Plate
1
Plug, Steel Hexagon Head /8” Pipe
Gasket, Oil Filter Head
Filter Shell with Flange and Plug
Flange, Oil Filter Tank
Tank, Oil Filter
7
Screw, Hexagon Head Cap /16” x 2”
Instruction/Nameplate (for use with A35241A)
(not shown)
Instruction/Nameplate (for use with A35240A)
(not shown)
Gauge, 2½”, 0-300 PSI, Oil Filter
Elbow, ¼” 90° Female Compression
Tubing, ¼” O.D. Steel
Tubing, ¼” O.D. Steel (“AR” – As Required)
Tee, ¼” Compression
Connector, ¼” MPT x ¼” O.D. Compression
Connector, ¼” MPT x ¼” O.D. Compression
Valve, 3-Way, Oil Filter
Bracket, Valve
Control, Pressure Differential
Gasket, Bearing Cover
5
Screw, /8” x 2” Hexagon Head Cap
Screw, ½” x 1¾” Hexagon Head Cap
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1448H
1448K
1448L
1448C
1448M
1448N
1448P
1448Q
13264A
1448B
A34623A
35125A
34623A
1689G
40680AJ
1
1
1
1
40680AT
1
1
3ft
AR
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
10
8
1
1
3ft
AR
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
10
8
1
1
3ft
AR
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
10
8
1
1
3ft
AR
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
10
8
31890A
1892B
S1589AA
S1589AA
13239C
13229D
13229D
2030A
35106A
1643V
31890A
13152E
2796EL
February 2001
Original Issue
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
SECTION 105-X
PAGE 10
460 VMC COMPRESSORS
CYLINDER LINER AND CAPACITY CONTROL REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 5
SECTION 105-X
PAGE 11
February 2001
Original Issue
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
460 VMC COMPRESSORS
CYLINDER LINER AND CAPACITY CONTROL REPLACEMENT PARTS
ITEM
401, 402
& 403
401, 402
Thru 408
401
402
403
405
405A
405B
406
407
408
409
410 & 411
410 & 411
410
410A
410B
411
413 thru
420
413
414
415
416
417
418
DESCRIPTION
Cylinder Liner Assembly
(for cylinder without unloading)
Cylinder Liner Assembly
(for cylinder with unloading)
Liner, Cylinder
Seal, ‘O’ Ring (upper)
Pin, Roll, 0.125” dia. X 1½” lg.
Ring, Lift
Ring, Lift
Pin, Roll
Spring, Lift
Pin, Lift
Retainer, Lift Ring
Plate, Suction Valve
Piston & Rings Assy., Cap Red (Gas or Oil †)
Piston & Rings Assy., Cap Red (Gas or Oil†)
Ring Set (PTFE & rubber)
Seal, Unload Piston (Oil only)
Ring, Retaining Unload Piston (Oil only)
Piston, Unloader
Complete Capacity Control Mechanism Assembly *
(Low Suction R717 and all Booster)
Arm, Yoke Lifting
Yoke Assembly
3
11
Pin, /8” x /16” lg. Roll
Pin, Short Pivot
Spring, Unloader Yoke
Yoke Guide Assembly
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
2
4
6
8
PART
NUMBER
2
2
2
4
KT475
1
2
2
8
1
1
4
4
4
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
--
2
4
4
16
2
2
4
8
8
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
6
6
24
4
4
4
16
16
4
6
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
4
8
8
32
4
4
4
16
16
4
8
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
KT476
34510A
2176BH
1193Q
A33351A
35380A
1193SS
33352A
33350A
1971A
31909A
A35315BX
A35315CX
2557A
2639A
2638A
35315A
A41788BX
-------
1
1
1
1
4
1
2
2
2
2
8
2
2
2
2
2
8
2
41725A
A33335A
1193X
33250B
33686A
A33347A
February 2001
Original Issue
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
460 VMC COMPRESSORS
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
AND SAFETY HEAD REPLACEMENT PARTS
FIGURE 6
SECTION 105-X
PAGE 12
SECTION 105-X
PAGE 13
VILTER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
February 2001
Original Issue
460 VMC COMPRESSORS
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
AND SAFETY HEAD REPLACEMENT PARTS
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
QUANTITY REQUIRED PER COMPRESSOR
NUMBER OF CYLINDERS
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
PART
NUMBER
KT573 *
501 thru
Piston Rings and Connecting Rod Assy Kit
508
501
Piston Ring, Compression
6
12
18
24
31989M
502
Piston Ring, Oil
2
4
6
8
31989N
503
Piston and Connecting Rod Assy
2
4
6
8
*
504, 507
Bearing Half and Lock Nut Kit
2
4
6
8
KT575
& 508
3
504
Lock Nut, /8”, Connecting Rod
4
8
12
16
2028A
3
505
Nut, Plain Hex /8”-UNF
4
8
12
16
2027A
506
Bolt, Connecting Rod
4
8
12
16
31955A
507
Bearing Half, Connecting Rod (upper)
2
4
6
8
Order KT575
508
Bearing Half, Connecting Rod (lower)
2
4
6
8
Order KT575
509
Spring, Safety Head
2
4
6
8
35252A
510
Safety Head Yoke Kit (includes 4 of item 513)
2
4
6
8
KT543
511
Spring, Valve
16
32
48
64
33803A
512
Plate, Discharge Valve
2
4
6
8
35080SS
513 &
Safety Hd. & Pins Assy (Standard Ammonia Compr)
2
4
6
8
A35082A
514
Safety Hd. & Pins Assy (#)
2
4
6
8
A35272A
11
513
Pin, Roll, 0.187” dia. x /16” lg.
8
16
24
32
1712F
514
Safety Head
2
4
6
8
**
515
Spring, Valve
8
16
24
32
33803A
NOTES:
*
Piston, wrist pin and connecting rod sold only as a kit.
**
Shown for disassembly purposes only, order assembly.
#
This Safety Head and Pins Assembly is used on standard Halocarbon and High Suction Pressure Ammonia Compressors. High
Suction Pressure Compressors are identified with an ‘X’ in the serial number.
35391B Rev. 1 (1/13) Emerson and Vilter are trademarks of Emerson Electric Co. or one of its affiliated companies. © 2013 Emerson Climate Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.